GE LOGIQ e ultrasound system Basic Service Manual

Technical Publication

LOGIQ e

Basic Service Manual

Direction Number: 5561650-100 English

Rev. 3

GE

All Material Copyright © 2015 by General Electric Company Inc.

All Rights Reserved.

Product Information

This Manual covers the software version of R8.x.x, R9.x.x for LOGIQ e ultrasound system.

GE

Copyright © 2015, General Electric Company.

GE Medical Systems, a General Electric Company, going to market as GE

Manufacturer:

GE Medical Systems (China) Co., Ltd.

No. 19, Changjiang Road

WuXi National Hi-Tech Development Zone

Jiangsu, P.R. China 214028

TEL: +86 510 85225888; FAX: +86 510 85226688 www.gehealthcare.com

Revision history

Rev.1

Rev.2

Rev.3

REV

Chapter Number

Front

Front matter

TOC

Chapter 1

Chapter 2

Chapter 3

Chapter 4

Chapter 5

Chapter 6

Revision History

DATE

(YYYY/MM/DD)

2015/03/10

2015/06/05

2015/08/28

Initial Release

REASON FOR CHANGE

Add software wiping information

Update spare part list

List of Effected Pages (LOEP)

Revision

Rev. 3

Rev. 3

Rev. 3

Rev. 3

Rev. 3

Rev. 3

Rev. 3

Rev. 3

Rev. 3

Chapter Number

Chapter 7

Chapter 8

Chapter 9

Chapter 10

Chapter 11

Chapter 12

Index

Rear Cover

Revision

Rev. 3

Rev. 3

Rev. 3

Rev. 3

Rev. 3

Rev. 3

Rev. 3

Rev. 3

Please verify that you are using the latest revision of this document. Information pertaining to this document is maintained on MyWorkshop/ePDM (GE electronic Product

Data Management). If you need to know the latest revision, contact your distributor, local

GE Sales Representative or in the USA call the GE Ultrasound Clinical Answer Center at

1 800 682 5327 or 1 262 524 5698.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3 i-1

Important precautions

Translation policy

i-2 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3 i-3

i-4 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3 i-5

i-6 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3 i-7

i-8 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3 i-9

i-10 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Damage in transportation

All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent, write “Damage In Shipment” on ALL copies of the freight or express bill BEFORE delivery is accepted or

“signed for” by a GE representative or hospital receiving agent.

Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested within this 14 day period.

Certified electrical contractor statement - For USA Only

All electrical Installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations and testing shall be performed by qualified GE personnel. In performing all electrical work on these products, GE will use its own specially trained field engineers. All of GE’s electrical work on these products will comply with the requirements of the applicable electrical codes.

The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE’s field engineers, personnel of third-party service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform electrical servicing on the equipment.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3 i-11

Omission and errors

Mail the information to:

If there are any omissions, errors or suggestions for improving this documentation, contact the GE Global Documentation

Group with specific information listing the system type, manual title, part number, revision number, page number and suggestion details.

GE Medical Systems (China) Co., Ltd.

No. 19 Changjiang Road

Wuxi National Hi-Tech Dev. Zone

Jiangsu

P.R.China 214028

GE employees should use TrackWise to report service documentation issues.

These issues will then be in the internal problem reporting tool and communicated to the writer.

i-12 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Service Safety Considerations

DANGER DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH,

ARE PRESENT IN THIS EQUIPMENT. USE EXTREME

CAUTION WHEN HANDLING, TESTING AND ADJUSTING.

WARNING

Use all Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) such as gloves, safety shoes, safety glasses, and kneeling pad, to reduce the risk of injury.

For a complete review of all safety requirements, refer to

Chapter 1 in the Service Manual.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3 i-13

Legal notes

The contents of this publication may not be copied or duplicated in any form, in whole or in part, without prior written permission of GE.

GE may revise this publication from time to time without written notice.

Proprietary to GE

Permission to use this Advanced Service Software and related documentation (herein called the material) by persons other than GE employees is provided only under an Advanced

Service Package License relating specifically to this Proprietary

Material. This is a different agreement from the one under which operating and basic service software is licensed. A license to use operating or basic service software does not extend to or cover this software or related documentation.

If you are a GE employee or a customer who has entered into such a license agreement with GE to use this proprietary software, you are authorized to use this Material according to the conditions stated in your license agreement.

However, you do not have the permission of GE to alter, decompose or reverse-assemble the software, and unless you are a GE employee, you may not copy the Material. The

Material is protected by Copyright and Trade Secret laws; the violation of which can result in civil damages and criminal prosecution.

If you are not party to such a license agreement or a GE

Employee, you must exit this Material now.

Trademarks

All products and their name brands are trademarks of their respective holders.

Copyrights

All Material Copyright © 2015 by General Electric Company Inc.

All Rights Reserved.

i-14 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Table of Contents

Translation policy - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - i-2

Damage in transportation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - i-11

Certified electrical contractor statement - For USA Only - - - - - - - - - - - - i-11

Omission and errors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - i-12

Service Safety Considerations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - i-13

Legal notes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - i-14

Proprietary to GE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - i-14

Trademarks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - i-14

Copyrights - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - i-14

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 — Introduction

Overview

Contents in this chapter- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-2

Manual Overview

Contents in This Section - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-3

Contents in this service manual - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-3

Typical users of the Basic Service Manual - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-4

LOGIQ e models covered by this manual - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-5

General Caution - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-6

Important conventions

Conventions used in book - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-7

Standard hazard icons - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-9

Product icons

Label Icon Description- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-11

Safety considerations

Introduction - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-19

Contents in this Section- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-19

Human Safety - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-19

Mechanical safety - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-22

Electrical safety - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-24

Battery Safety- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-26

Dangerous procedure warnings

Lockout/Tagout (LOTO) requirements

Returning probes and repair parts

EMC, EMI and ESD

Contents in this Section- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-32

What is EMC? - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-32

CE Compliance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-32

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) prevention - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-33

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3 i-15

Customer assistance

Contact information- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-34

Phone numbers for Customer Assistance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-35

System manufacturer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-35

Factory Site - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-35

Chapter 2 — Site Preparations

Overview

Contents in this chapter- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2

General requirements

Contents in this Section- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-3

Ultrasound system environmental requirements- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-3

Electrical requirements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-6

EMI limitations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-9

Probes environmental requirements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-11

Facility needs

Purchaser responsibilities - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-12

Required facility needs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-13

Desirable features- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-14

Suggested and Alternate Ultrasound Room Layout - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-15

Networking setup requirements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-16

Environmental Dangers

Patient Environment IEC60601-1and ANSI AAMI ES60601-1 - - - - - - - 2-19

Chapter 3 — System Setup

Overview

Contents in this chapter- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-2

Setup reminders

Contents in this Section- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-3

Average setup time - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-3

Setup warnings- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-3

Receiving and unpacking the equipment

Contents in this Section- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-6

Receiving the LOGIQ e - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-6

Unpacking the LOGIQ e - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-7

Packing the Equipment - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-11

Preparing for setup

Verify customer order - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-12

Physical inspection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-12

EMI protection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-12

Completing the setup

Contents in this Section- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-13

System specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-13

Electrical specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-14

Power On / Boot Up - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-15

Power Off/Shutdown - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-17

Connecting probes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-18

System Configuration

Contents in this Section- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-20 i-16 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

LOGIQ e configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-21

Connecting Cables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-24

Peripheral/Accessories Connector Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-25

Available probes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-30

Software Options configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-31

Connectivity setup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-31

Paperwork after setup

User’s Manual(s) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-33

Product Locator Installation Card - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-33

Peripherals Installation

Contents in this Section- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-34

Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-35

Furnished materials - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-36

Peripherals Installation Instructions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-38

Chapter 4 — General Procedures and Functional Checks

Overview

Contents in this chapter- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-2

Special Equipment required - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-2

General procedures

Contents in this Section- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-3

Caution and Warning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-4

Power ON/Boot Up - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-5

Power shut down - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-11

Removable media - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-13

Archiving and loading presets - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-13

Where are the User Manuals and the Service Manual? - - - - - - - - - - - 4-15

How to display or print the PDF files from the Manual CD-ROM? - - - - 4-15

Lockout/Tagout (LOTO) requirements- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-16

Functional checks

Contents in this Section- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-17

Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-18

Operator Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-18

Soft Menu Key Tour - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-19

Monitor Display- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-20

Performance Tests - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-21

Software Configuration Checks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-52

Peripheral Checks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-52

Chapter 5 — Components and Functions (Theory)

Overview

Contents in this chapter- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-2

Block Diagram and Theory

Contents in this Section- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-3

Block Diagram - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-3

General Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-4

Top Console- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-4

Power Diagram

Contents in this Section- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-5

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3 i-17

Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-5

AC Power - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-5

Battery Charging- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-6

Air Flow Distribution - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-6

Common Service Platform

Contents in this Chapter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-7

Introduction - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-7

The usage for security cable - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-8

Global Service User Interface (GSUI) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-9

Service Login - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-9

Access/Security - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-10

Customer Service Home Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-13

Chapter 6 — Service Adjustments

LCD Monitor adjustments

Purpose of this section - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-2

Monitor Adjustments - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-2

Chapter 7 — Diagnostics/Troubleshooting

Overview

Contents in this chapter- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-2

Gathering Trouble Data

Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3

Contents in this Section- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3

Collect Vital System Information- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3

Collect a Trouble Image with Logs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-5

USB Quick Save

Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-7

Check and Record the P3 Key Function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-7

Setting the P3 Key to USB Quick Save - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-8

Screen Capture

Contents in this Section- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-9

Check and Record the P1 Key Function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-10

Setting the P1 Key to Screen Capture- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-10

Capturing a Screen - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-11

Reset the P1 Key to Customer’s Functionality - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-12

Global Service User Interface (GSUI)

Contents in This Section - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-13

Common Diagnostics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-13

Network Configuration

Contents in This Section - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-17

Network Configuration- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-17

Chapter 8 — Replacement Procedures

Overview

Contents in this chapter- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-2

Warnings and important information

Warnings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-3

Returning/shipping probes and repair parts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-4 i-18 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Disassembly/Re-assembly

Warning and Caution - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-5

Handle Assy (Part No. 5483188) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-6

Advanced Isolation Cart Components Replacement- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-7

Loading the software

Contents in This Section - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-13

Purpose of this section - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-13

Customer provided prerequisite - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-13

Data Management - moving all images - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-14

Backing up the Patient Archive and System Configurations - - - - - - - - 8-14

Recording important settings and parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-15

Loading the System Software - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-16

Chapter 9 — Renewal Parts

Overview

Contents in this chapter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-2

List of Abbreviations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-2

Renewal Parts Lists

Contents in This Section - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-3

Power Cable - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-4

Operator Console Assy - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-5

LCD Assy- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-6

Keyboard Assy - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-7

Bottom Assy- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-9

E-Isolation Cart and Advanced Isolation Cart - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-14

Accessories and Kits- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-17

Probe - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-20

Manuals- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-22

Chapter 10 — Care and Maintenance

Overview

Contents in this chapter- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-2

Protecting Health Information

Hide Patient Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-3

Protecting Health Information- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-4

Software Wiping to Erase Patient Data (For R9.x.x only) - - - - - - - - - - 10-5

Users- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-9

Logon - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-11

Warnings

Why do maintenance

Periodic maintenance inspections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-13

Keeping records - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-13

Quality assurance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-14

Maintenance task schedule

How often should maintenance tasks be performed? - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-15

Tools required

Standard GE tool kit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-17

GE-2 tool kit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-19

Special tools, supplies and equipment used for maintenance - - - - - - 10-20

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3 i-19

System maintenance

Contents in This Section - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-21

Preliminary checks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-21

Functional checks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-23

Physical inspection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-25

Optional Diagnostic Checks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-26

Probe maintenance- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-27

Battery Performance Maintenance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-29

Electrical safety tests

Contents in This Section - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-30

Safety test overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-30

Leakage current limits - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-33

Outlet test - wiring arrangement - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-35

Grounding continuity - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-36

Chassis leakage current test - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-37

Probe leakage current test- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-39

When there's too much leakage current …

AC/DC Fails - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-42

Chassis Fails - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-42

Probe Fails- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-43

Peripheral Fails - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-43

Still Fails - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-43

New Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-43

ECG Fails - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-43

Inspection Paperwork

Ultrasound Inspection Forms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-44

Electrical Safety Tests Log

Chapter 11 — Docking Cart Setup

Overview

Contents in this chapter- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-2

Set Up Docking Cart

Contents in This Section - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-4

Setup Reminders - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-5

Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-8

Preparing for Installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-12

Peripheral Installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-14

Options Installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-24

Paperwork - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-38

Cart Using

Contents in This Section - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-39

Introduction - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-39

Height Adjustment - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-39

Locking the Wheels- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-40

Mounting the System to Cart - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-40

Release the System from Docking Cart- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-41

Switch the Three Probes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-42

System Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-42 i-20 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Docking Cart Functions (Theory)

Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-43

Block Diagram - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-43

Information- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-44

Supported External Interface/Port- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-44

Diagnostics/Troubleshooting

Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-45

Troubleshooting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-45

Gathering Trouble Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-45

Troubleshooting Trees - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-46

Chapter 12 — Docking Cart Servicing

Overview

Contents in this chapter- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-2

List of Abbreviations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-2

Replacement Procedure

Introduction - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-3

Contents in this Section- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-3

Disassembly/Re-assembly- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-3

Renewal Parts

Contents in This Section - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-12

Introduction - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-12

Power Cable - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-13

Operator Console Assy - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-14

Docking Station - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-15

Probe Holder - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-17

Shelf Service - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-19

Bottom and Wheels- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-20

Panel and Cabinet - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-21

Gas Spring and Gas Spring Lever - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-21

Power Box and Extended Life Battery- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-21

Care & Maintenance

Contents in This Section - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-23

Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-23

Why do Maintenance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-25

Maintenance Task Schedule - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-26

Tools Required - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-28

Cleaning Dusk Screen- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-29

Safety Test- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-30

Safety Test (continued) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-33

When There’s Too Much Leakage Current... - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-34

Inspection Paper Work - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-35

Index

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3 i-21

i-22 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Chapter 1

Introduction

This chapter describes important issues related to safely servicing the Ultrasound system and Docking

Cart. The service provider must read and understand all the information presented here before installing or servicing the units.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

1-1

Introduction

Overview

Contents in this chapter

• ‘Overview’ on page 1-2

• ‘Manual Overview’ on page 1-3

• ‘Important conventions’ on page 1-7

• ‘Product icons’ on page 1-11

• ‘Safety considerations’ on page 1-19

• ‘Dangerous procedure warnings’ on page 1-29

• ‘Lockout/Tagout (LOTO) requirements’ on page 1-30

• ‘Returning probes and repair parts’ on page 1-31

• ‘EMC, EMI and ESD’ on page 1-32

• ‘Customer assistance’ on page 1-34

1-2 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Manual Overview

Manual Overview

This manual provides installation and service information for the

LOGIQ e Ultrasound system and docking cart. It is divided in twelve chapters as shown below.

Contents in This Section

• ‘Contents in this service manual’ on page 1-3

• ‘Typical users of the Basic Service Manual’ on page 1-4

• ‘LOGIQ e models covered by this manual’ on page 1-5

• ‘General Caution’ on page 1-6

Contents in this service manual

The manual is divided into twelve chapters.

In the beginning of the manual, before chapter 1, you will find the Revision overview, the Important precautions including

Translation policy, Damage in transportation, Certified electrical

contractor statement, Omission & errors, Service safety

considerations and Legal notes, and the Table of Contents

(TOC).

Chapter number

1.

2.

3.

4.

Table 1-1: Contents in this manual

Chapter title Description

‘Introduction’

‘Site

Preparations’

Contains a content summary and warnings.

Contains pre-setup requirements for the

LOGIQ e and Docking Cart.

‘System Setup’

Contains setup procedure with procedure checklist for the system.

‘General

Procedures and

Functional

Checks’

Contains functional checks for the system that must be performed as part of the installation, or as required during servicing and periodic maintenance.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

1-3

Introduction

Table 1-1: Contents in this manual (Continued)

Chapter title Description Chapter number

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

N/A

‘Components and Functions

(Theory)’

‘Service

Adjustments’

‘Diagnostics/

Troubleshooting’

Contains block diagrams and functional explanations of the electronics for the system.

Contains instructions on how to make any available adjustments to the LOGIQ e system.

‘Replacement

Procedures’

Provides disassembly procedures and reassembly procedures for all changeable FRU on the system.

‘Renewal Parts’

Contains a complete list of replacement parts for

LOGIQ e system.

‘Care and

Maintenance’

‘Docking Cart

Setup’

Provides procedures for running diagnostic or related routines for the LOGIQ e system.

Provides periodic maintenance procedures for

LOGIQ e system.

Provides setup information for Docking Cart, including use, test and trouble shooting of

Docking Cart.

‘Docking Cart

Servicing’

Index

Provides service information for Docking Cart, including replacement, spare parts and

Maintenance.

A quick way to the topic you’re looking for.

Typical users of the Basic Service Manual

• Service personnel (installation, maintenance, etc.)

• Contractors (some parts of Chapter 2 - Pre-Installation)

NOTE: Not all features, products, probes or peripherals described in this document may ba available or cleared for sale in all markets. Please refer to the user manual or contact your local sale representative to get the latest information.

1-4 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Manual Overview

LOGIQ e models covered by this manual

Table 1-2: LOGIQ e Model Designations (For R8.x.x)

Model Number

5483518

5483522

5498957

5499582

5483520

5483521

Description

LOGIQ e Console for USA

LOGIQ e Console Generic version

LOGIQ e Console for CKD

LOGIQ e Console for Canada

LOGIQ e Console for Korea

LOGIQ e Console for China

Table 1-3: LOGIQ e Model Designations (For R9.x.x)

Model Number

5604173

Description

LOGIQ e Console Generic version

NOTE: When not otherwise specified, the contents of this manual applies to all LOGIQ e models.

Purpose of the operator manual(s)

The operator manuals should be fully read and understood before operating the LOGIQ e and also kept near the unit for quick reference.

The online versions of the operator manuals are available via the Help function on LOGIQ e’s operator panel.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

1-5

Introduction

General Caution

CAUTION

Standard maintenance must be performed by authorized service personnel for the lifetime of the product (7 years).

CAUTION

CAUTION

Proceed cautiously when crossing door or elevator thresholds with the Docking Cart or Isolation Cart. Use the handle to push/ pull the system, e.g., do not use the Docking Cart external

LCD. Failure to do so may cause serious injury or system damage.

Capacity load of the Docking Cart: The maximum capacity load of the Storage rack (1) is 2kg, DVD-RW Shelf (2) is 2kg, B/W

Printer Shelf (3) is 4kg, Color Printer Shelf (4) is 7kg, refer to the following figure.

1-6

Figure 1-1. Capacity load of the Docking Cart

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Important conventions

Important conventions

Conventions used in book

Important conventions, used in this document, are described next.

Model designations

This manual covers the LOGIQ e Ultrasound systems listed in:

‘LOGIQ e models covered by this manual’ on page 1-5 .

Icons

Pictures, or icons, are used wherever they will reinforce the printed message. The icons, labels, and conventions used on the product and in the service information are described in this chapter.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

1-7

Introduction

Safety precaution messages

Various levels of safety precaution messages may be found on the equipment and in the service information. The different levels of concern are identified by a flag word that precedes the precautionary message. Known or potential hazards to personnel are labeled in one of three ways:

• DANGER

• WARNING

• CAUTION

DANGER

Danger is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that will cause severe personal injury or death if the instructions are ignored.

WARNING

Warning is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that can cause severe personal injury and property damage if instructions are ignored.

CAUTION

Caution is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that will or can cause minor personal injury and property damage if instructions are ignored. Equipment damage possible.

NOTE: Notes are used to provide important information about an item or a procedure.

NOTE: Be sure to read the notes; the information contained in a note can often save you time or effort.

1-8 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Important conventions

Standard hazard icons

Important information will always be preceded by either the exclamation point (!) contained within a triangle, or the symbols for “Danger”, “Warning” or “Caution”, as seen throughout this chapter. In addition to text, several different graphical icons

(symbols) may be used to make you aware of specific types of hazards that could possibly cause harm. Even if a symbol isn’t used in this manual, it may be included for your reference.

Table 1-4: Standard hazard icons

ELECTRICAL

MECHANICAL

RADIATION

LASER

HEAT

PINCH

NOTE: Even if a symbol isn’t used on the product or in this manual, it may be included for your reference.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

1-9

Introduction

Standard Icons that indicate that a special procedure is to be used

Some others icons make you aware of specific procedures that should be followed.

Table 1-5: Standard Icons that indicates that a special procedure is to be used

Avoid Static Electricity Tag and Lock Out Wear Eye Protection

Hand Protection Foot Protection Wear Eye Protection

Be sure to read the notes; the information contained in a note can often save you time or effort.

1-10 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Product icons

Product icons

The following table describes the purpose and location of safety labels and other important information provided on the equipment.

Label Icon Description

Label/Icon

Identification and Rating Plate

The following table describes the purpose and location of safety labels and other important information provided on the equipment.

Table 1-6: Product Icons

Purpose/Meaning

• Manufacture’s name and address

• Date of manufacture

• Model and serial numbers

• Electrical ratings (Volts, Amps, phase, and frequency)

Location

Rating plate

Date of manufacture: The date could be a year, year and month, or year, month and day, as appropriate. See ISO 8601 for date formats.

Bottom

Catalog or model number

Bottom

Serial number

Bottom

Direct Current: For products to be powered from a DC supply

Bottom

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

1-11

Introduction

Label/Icon

Table 1-6: Product Icons (Continued)

Input

Purpose/Meaning

Bottom

Location

For use with adapter GE part number 5460229-x

Description

Bottom

Bottom

Type/Class Label

IP Code (IPX8)

IPX8: MKF 2-MED GP26

Model Rear of Docking Cart

Only for use with LOGIQ e series (Software version should be R8.x.x or higher)

Rear of Docking Cart

Made in China Rear of Docking Cart

Used to indicate the degree of safety or protection.

Indicates the degree of protection provided by the enclosure per IEC60 529.

IPX8 can be used in an operating room environment.

Authorized European

Representative address.

Bottom of Footswitch

Bottom panel

United States only

Prescription Requirement label.

Bottom panel

Type BF Applied Part (man in the box) symbol is in accordance with IEC 878-02-03.

Beside the probe connector

1-12 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Product icons

Label/Icon

Table 1-6: Product Icons (Continued)

Purpose/Meaning

General Warning.

Various

Location

“CAUTION” - Dangerous voltage” (the lightning flash with arrowhead) is used to indicate electric shock hazards.

Various

“ON” indicates the power on position of the power switch.

CAUTION: This Power Switch

DOES NOT ISOLATE Mains

Supply.

“Protective Earth” indicates the protective earth (grounding) terminal.

See the Console

Overview section for location information.

Inside of AC adapter

NRTL Listing and Certification

Mark is used to designate conformance to nationally recognized product safety standards. The Mark bears the name and/or logo of the testing laboratory, product category, safety standard to which conformity is assessed and a control number.

Type CF Defib-Proof Applied

Part (heart in the box with paddle) symbol is in accordance with IEC 60878-02-06.

Bottom

ECG Module

“Consult accompanying documents“ is intended to alert the user to refer to the operator manual or other instructions when complete information cannot be provided on the label.

Do not push the system.

Various

Rear of Docking Cart/

Isolation Cart

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

1-13

Introduction

Label/Icon

Table 1-6: Product Icons (Continued)

Purpose/Meaning

This symbol indicates that waste electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste and must be collected separately. Please contact an authorized representative of the manufacturer for information concerning the decommissioning of your equipment.

The separate collection symbol is affixed to a battery, or its packaging, to advise you that the battery must be recycled or disposed of in accordance with local or country laws. The letters below the separate collection symbol indicate whether certain elements

(Pb=Lead,Cd=Cadmium,

Hg=Mercury) are contained in the battery. To minimize potential effects on the environment and human health, it is important that all marked batteries that you remove from the product are properly recycled or disposed. For information on how the battery may be safely removed from the device, please consult the service manual or equipment instructions. Information on the potential effects on the environment and human health of the substances used in batteries is available at this url: http://www.gehealthcare.com/ euen/weee-recycling/index.html

Bottom

Location

Battery Pack if contains

Pb/Cd/Hg

1-14 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Product icons

Label/Icon

Table 1-6: Product Icons (Continued)

Purpose/Meaning

No hazardous substance, above the maximum concentration value, is present. Maximum concentration values for electronic information products, as set by the People’s Republic of China Electronic Industry

Standard SJ/T11364-2006, include the hazardous substances of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, cadmium, polybrominated biphenyl (PBB), and polybrominated diphenyl ether

(PBDE).

Indicates the presence of hazardous substance(s) above the maximum concentration value. Maximum concentration values for electronic information products, as set by the People’s

Republic of China Electronic

Industry Standard SJ/

T11364-2006, include the hazardous substances of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, cadmium, polybrominated biphenyl (PBB), and polybrominated diphenyl ether

(PBDE). “10” indicates the number of years during which the hazardous substance(s) will not leak or mutate so that the use of this product will not result in any severe environmental pollution, bodily injury, or damage to any assets.

Location

Probe and Rear Panel,

China Rating Plate

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

1-15

Introduction

Label/Icon

Table 1-6: Product Icons (Continued)

Purpose/Meaning

Indicates the presence of hazardous substance(s) above the maximum concentration value. Maximum concentration values for electronic information products, as set by the People’s

Republic of China Electronic

Industry Standard SJ/

T11364-2006, include the hazardous substances of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, cadmium, polybrominated biphenyl (PBB), and polybrominated diphenyl ether

(PBDE). “20” indicates the number of years during which the hazardous substance(s) will not leak or mutate so that the use of this product will not result in any severe environmental pollution, bodily injury, or damage to any assets.

When closing the LCD cover, use caution to avoid injuring hands or fingers as there is a closing mechanism which allows the LCD cover to automatically close.

Location

Rating Plate

Bottom

Do not connect the DVD-RW to the system while scanning.

The DVD-RW can be used when connecting to the Docking

Cart.

DVD-RW

GOST symbol: Russia

Regulatory Country Clearance.

This product consists of devices that may contain mercury, which must be recycled or disposed of in accordance with local, state, or country laws. (Within this system, the backlight lamps in the monitor display, contain mercury.)

Bottom Note: Only after

Russian regulatory registration is complete, this label will be located on the console rating plate.

Bottom

1-16 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Product icons

Label/Icon

Table 1-6: Product Icons (Continued)

Purpose/Meaning

INMETRO Certification: TUV

Rheinland Brazil

Location

Rating plate Note: Only after Brazilian regulatory registration is complete, this label will be located on the console rating plate.

Disconnect the probe connector of Three-Probe Port before remove the system from

Docking Cart Platform, otherwise the probe cable will be damaged.

Docking Cart Top Cover

Guidance on how to connect the system to the docking cart and how to release it.

When put the system on docking cart top cover, avoid injuring the fingers and hands.

Make sure the system’s handle is locked well after mounting the system to docking cart top cover. When connecting the probe connector to the system, press the probe connector locking lever up. When releasing the system from the docking cart, disconnect the probe connector of Three-Probe

Port from the system before lifting up the system.

Do not disconnect the probe connector of Three-probe Port from the system when the system is in use.

Docking Cart Top Cover

Probe Connector of

Three-Probe Port

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

1-17

Introduction

Label/Icon

Table 1-6: Product Icons (Continued)

Purpose/Meaning

Do not let the 3-Probe Port drop down when mounting it to the docking cart. The 3-Probe Port will be damaged if it drops on hard surface.

Location

3-Probe Port

When pushing the Extended

Life Battery in to the power box, use caution to avoid injuring fingers and hands.

Power Box

1-18 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Safety considerations

Safety considerations

Introduction

Contents in this Section

• ‘Human Safety’ on page 1-19

• ‘Mechanical safety’ on page 1-22

• ‘Electrical safety’ on page 1-24

• ‘Battery Safety’ on page 1-26

Human Safety

The following safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation, service and repair of this equipment.

Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual, violates safety standards of design, manufacture and intended use of the equipment.

• Operating personnel must not remove the system covers.

• Servicing should be performed by authorized personnel only.

Only personnel who have participated in a LOGIQ e Training

Seminar are authorized to service the equipment.

DANGER

DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING

DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN THIS EQUIPMENT. USE

EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING, TESTING

AND ADJUSTING.

WARNING

If the covers are removed from an operating LOGIQ e, some metal surfaces may be warm enough to pose a potential heat hazard if touched, even while in shutdown mode.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

1-19

Introduction

Human Safety (continued)

WARNING

WARNING

Explosion Warning

DO NOT operate the equipment in an explosive atmosphere.

Operation of any electrical equipment in such an environment constitutes a definite safety hazard.

DO NOT substitute parts or modify equipment

Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, ONLY install GE approved parts. DO NOT perform any unauthorized modification of the equipment.

WARNING

WARNING

Ensure that the Ultrasound system is turned off and unplugged

Wait for at least 20 seconds for capacitors to discharge as there are no test points to verify isolation. The amber light on the OP panel ON/OFF button will turn off.

Ultrasound system components may be energized. Always refer to the Ultrasound system's Proprietary Service Manual for

LOTO warnings and cautions

Risk of electrical shock, Ultrasound system must be turned off and disconnected from power source. Cord must be controlled at all times.

Wait for at least 20 seconds for capacitors to discharge as there are no test points to verify isolation. The amber light on the OP panel on/off button will turn off.

Ultrasound System components may be energized. Always refer to the Ultrasound system's Proprietary Service Manual for

LOTO warnings and cautions

1-20 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Safety considerations

Human Safety (continued)

WARNING

Use all Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) such as gloves, safety shoes, safety glasses, and kneeling pad, to reduce the risk of injury.

WARNING

Beware of possible sharp edges on all mechanical parts. If sharp edges are encountered, the appropriate PPE should be used to reduce the risk of injury.

WARNING

Wear all PPE including gloves as indicated in the chemical

MSDS.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

1-21

Introduction

Mechanical safety

WARNING

WARNING

WARNING

While the software install procedure is designed to preserve data, you should save any patient data, images, system setups to removable media or hardcopy before doing a software upgrade.

Ultrasound probes are highly sensitive medical instruments that can easily be damaged by improper handling. Use care when handling and protect from damage when not in use. do not use a damaged or defective probe. Failure to follow these precautions can result in serious injury and equipment damage.

Never use a probe that has fallen to the floor. Even if it looks

OK, it may be damaged.

CAUTION

LOGIQ e system weighs 5.2 kg or more, depending on installed peripherals, when ready for use. Care must be used when moving it or replacing its parts.

ALWAYS:

• Use the handle to move the Ultrasound system.

• Do not let the Ultrasound system strike walls or door frame.

NOTE: Special care should be taken when transporting the Ultrasound system in a vehicle:

case.

• Ensure that the system is firmly secured while inside the vehicle.

• Secure system with straps or as directed otherwise to prevent motion during transport.

• Prevent vibration damage by driving cautiously. Avoid unpaved roads, excessive speeds, and erratic stops or starts.

1-22 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Safety considerations

Mechanical safety (continued)

CAUTION

The Docking Cart weighs 53 kg (117 lb.) or more, depending on installed peripherals, when ready for use. Care must be used when moving it or replacing its parts.

Failure to follow the precautions listed below could result in injury, uncontrolled motion and costly damage.

ALWAYS:

• be sure the pathway is clear

• use slow, careful motions

• Limit movement to a slow careful walk.

• use two people when moving on inclines or lifting more than 16 kg (35 lbs)

WARNING

When the docking cart is raised for a repair or moved along any incline, use external caution since it may become unstable and tip over.

CAUTION

Make sure the console be fixed well to avoid the console falling down when moving Docking Cart.

CAUTION

Do not move Docking Cart with big incline angle.

Do

CAUTION

CAUTION

The Docking Cart is not water proof. Do not expose the

Docking Cart to water or any kind of liquid.

Never set liquids on the Docking Cart to ensure that liquid does not drip into the unit

Put peripherals in correct position to avoid Docking Cart overload.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

1-23

Introduction

Mechanical safety (continued)

NOTE: Special care should be taken when transporting the Docking

Cart in a vehicle.

•

Secure the unit in an upright position.

•

Lock the wheels (brake)

Electrical safety

Safe practices

Follow these guidelines to minimize shock hazards whenever you are using the Ultrasound system:

• To minimize shock hazard, the equipment chassis must be connected to an electrical ground.

• The Ultrasound system is equipped with a three-conductor

AC power cable. This must be plugged into an approved electrical outlet with safety ground.

• The power outlet used for this equipment should not be shared with other types of equipment.

• Both the system power cable and the power connector must meet international electrical standards

WARNING

Connecting a LOGIQ e to the wrong voltage level will most likely destroy it.

1-24 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Probes

Peripherals

Safety considerations

Follow these guidelines before connecting a probe to the

Ultrasound system:

• Inspect the probe prior to each use for damage or degradation to the:

• housing

• cable strain relief

• lens

• seal

• Do not use a damaged or defective probe.

• Never immerse the probe connector or adapter into any liquid.

Refer to the Patient Safety Environment section of the User’s

Manual for peripheral isolation information.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

1-25

Introduction

Battery Safety

WARNING

To avoid the risk of injury, follow the warning and cautions to make sure that the battery does not burst, ignite, or generate heat of fumes.

• The battery has a safety device. Do not disassemble or alter the battery.

• Do not short-circuit the battery by directly connecting the negative terminals with metal objects.

• Do not heat the battery or discard it in a fire.

• Do not charge the battery near a heat source, such as a fire or heater.

• Do not leave the battery in direct sunlight.

• Do not drop packs from height to prevent them from possible malfunction damage.

• Do not drop packs from height to prevent them from possible malfunction damage.

• Do not pierce the battery with a sharp object, hit it, or step on it.

• Do not use a damaged battery.

• Do not solder a battery.

• Do not connect the battery to an electrical power outlet.

• Do not contact PCM (Power Control and Monitor, it’s a small board in the battery) directly to prevent packs from

ESD damage.

• In case of longer non-use of the LOGIQ e, please make sure the battery is removed.

1-26 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Safety considerations

Battery Safety (continued)

Temperature Requirements

The battery should be charged, discharged and stored within the parameters outlined below:

• Charge: 10 - 30°C (50 - 86°F).

• Discharge: 10 - 40°C (50 - 104°F)

CAUTION

To ensure the power supplied to the system during system use,

DO NOT disconnect the system power cord from the AC outlet when the environmental temperature is below 10°C(50°F) or above 30°C(86°F). The battery will possibly not be charged properly in the environment temperature of below 10°C (50°F) or above 30°C(86°F) and can not supply power to the system.

WARNING

• Storage time < 3 months: -20 - 40°C (-4 - 104°F)

• Storage time >= 3 months: -20 - 20°C (-4 - 68°F)

Do not expose the battery to temperature over 60°C (140°F).

Keep it away from fire and other heat sources.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

1-27

Introduction

Battery Safety (continued)

CAUTION

To avoid the battery bursting, igniting, or fumes from the battery causing equipment damage, observe the following precautions:

• Do not immerse the battery in water or allow it to get wet.

• Do not put the battery into a microwave oven or pressurized container.

• If the battery leaks or emits an odor, remove it from all possible flammable sources.

• If the battery emits an odor or heat, is deformed or discolored, or in a way appears abnormal during use, recharging or storage, immediately remove it and stop using it. If you have any questions about the battery, consult GE or your local representative.

• Use only GE recognized batteries.

• When the system isn't powered on continuously more than

6 months, in order to prevent leakage and deterioration in performance of CMOS battery, power on the system at least once per 6 months for more than 10 hours to have

CMOS battery fully charged. Time and date need to be re-setup.

NOTE: The battery shall be shipped in about 30% charged state. Those packs have to be fully charged and discharged up to 3 times to utilize Li-lon smart packs before use.

1-28 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Dangerous procedure warnings

Dangerous procedure warnings

DANGER

WARNING

Warnings, such as the example below, precede potentially dangerous procedures throughout this manual. Instructions contained in the warnings must be followed.

DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING

DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN THIS EQUIPMENT. USE

EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING, TESTING

AND ADJUSTING.

If the covers are removed from an operating LOGIQ e, some metal surfaces may be warm enough to pose a potential heat hazard if touched, even while in shutdown mode.

WARNING

WARNING

WARNING

Explosion Warning

DO NOT operate the equipment in an explosive atmosphere.

Operation of any electrical equipment in such an environment constitutes a definite safety hazard.

DO NOT substitute parts or modify equipment

Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, ONLY install GE approved parts. DO NOT perform any unauthorized modification of the equipment.

SHUT DOWN FORCEDLY OR PLUG IN/OUT ACDC

INVALID MAY CAUSE THE DAMAGE OF SYSTEM

FILES.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

1-29

Introduction

Lockout/Tagout (LOTO) requirements

Follow Lockout/Tagout requirements by ensuring you are in total control of the AC power plug at all times during the service process.

To apply Lockout/Tagout (LOTO):

1. Plan and prepare for shutdown.

WARNING

4. Remove/disconnect the battery, if present.

6. Control all stored and residual energy.

All potentially hazardous stored or residual energy is relieved.

Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ e.

When servicing parts of the Ultrasound system where there is exposure to voltage greater than 30 volts:

1. Follow LOCK OUT/TAG OUT procedures.

2. Turn off the breaker.

3. Unplug the Ultrasound system.

4. Maintain control of the Ultrasound system power plug.

5. Wait for at least 30 seconds for capacitors to discharge as there are no test points to verify isolation.

Ultrasound System components may be energized.

1-30 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Returning probes and repair parts

Returning probes and repair parts

Equipment being returned must be clean and free of blood and other infectious substances. GE policy states that body fluids must be properly removed from any part or equipment prior to shipment. GE employees, as well as customers, are responsible for ensuring that parts/equipment have been properly decontaminated prior to shipment. Under no circumstance should a part or equipment with visible body fluids be taken or shipped from a clinic or site (for example, body coils or an ultrasound probe).

The purpose of the regulation is to protect employees in the transportation industry, as well as the people who will receive or open this package.

NOTE: The US Department of Transportation (DOT) has ruled that

“items that were saturated and/or dripping with human blood that are now caked with dried blood; or which were used or intended for use in patient care” are “regulated medical waste” for transportation purposes and must be transported as a hazardous material.

NOTE: The USER/SERVICE staff should dispose of all the waste properly, per federal, state, and local waste disposal regulations.

The Ultrasound system is not meant to be used for long-term storage of patient data or images. The user is responsible for the data on the system and a regular backup is highly recommended.

If the system is sent for repair, please ensure that any patient information is backed up and erased from the system before shipping. It is always possible during system failure and repair to lose patient data. GE is not responsible for the loss of this data.

If PHI (Patient Healthcare Information) data needs to be sent to

GE employees for service purposes, GE will ascertain agreement from the customer. Patient information shall only be transferred by approved service processes, tools and devices restricting access, protecting or encrypting data where required, and providing traceability in the form of paper or electronic documents at each stage of the procedure while maintaining compliance with cross-border restrictions of patient information transfers.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

1-31

Introduction

EMC, EMI and ESD

Contents in this Section

• ‘What is EMC?’ on page 1-32

• ‘CE Compliance’ on page 1-32

• ‘Electrostatic discharge (ESD) prevention’ on page 1-33

What is EMC?

Electromagnetic compatibility describes a level of performance of a device within its electromagnetic environment. This environment consists of the device itself and its surroundings including other equipment, power sources and persons with which the device must interface. Inadequate compatibility results when a susceptible device fails to perform as intended due interference from its environment or when the device produces unacceptable levels of emission to its environment. This interference is often referred to as radio–frequency or electromagnetic interference (RFI/EMI) and can be radiated through space or conducted over interconnecting power of signal cables. In addition to electromagnetic energy, EMC also includes possible effects from electrical fields, magnetic fields, electrostatic discharge and disturbances in the electrical power supply.

CE Compliance

LOGIQ e conforms to all applicable conducted and radiated emission limits and to immunity from electrostatic discharge, radiated and conducted RF fields, magnetic fields and power line transient requirements.

For applicable standards, refer to the Safety Chapter of the

Ultrasound system’s User’s Manual.

NOTE: For CE Compliance, it is critical that all covers, screws, shielding, gaskets, mesh, clamps, are in good condition, installed tightly without skew or stress. Proper installation following all comments noted in this service manual is required in order to achieve full EMC performance.

1-32 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

EMC, EMI and ESD

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) prevention

WARNING

DO NOT touch any boards with integrated circuits prior to taking the necessary ESD precautions.

Always connect yourself, via an arm-wrist strap, to the advised

ESD connection point located on the rear of the Ultrasound system (near the power connector).

Follow general guidelines for handling of electrostatic sensitive equipment.

WARNING

Risk of electrical shock, Ultrasound system must be turned off.

Avoid all contact with electrical contacts, conductors and components. Always use non-conductive handles designed for the removal and replacement of ESD sensitive parts. All parts that have the potential for storing energy must be discharged or isolated before making contact.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

1-33

Introduction

Customer assistance

Contact information

If this equipment does not work as indicated in this service manual or in the user manual, or if you require additional assistance, please contact the local distributor or appropriate support resource, as listed below.

Before you call, identify the following information, and acquire image (Alt+D) to send to the Customer Care team:

1. System ID serial number.

3. Date and time of occurrence.

4. Sequence of events leading to issue.

5. Is the issue repeatable?

6. Imaging mode, probe, preset/application.

7. Media brand, speed, capacity, type.

8. Save secondary image capture, cine loop, 4D multi-volume loop.

NOTE: Restart the application before resuming clinical scanning.

1-34 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Customer assistance

Phone numbers for Customer Assistance

LOCATION

USA

GE Healthcare - GE Medical Systems

Ultrasound & Primary Care Diagnostics, LLC

9900 Innovation Drive

Wauwatosa, WI 53226

Canada

Latin America

Table 1-7: Phone numbers for Customer Assistance

Europe

GE Ultraschall Deutschland Gmbh & Co. KG

Beethovenstrasse 239

Postfach 11 05 60, D-42655 Solingen

Germany

Asia (Singapore)

GE Ultrasound Asia

Service Department - Ultrasound

298 Tiong Bahru Road #15-01/06

Central Placa

Singapore 168730

Japan Support Center

Service: On-site

Service Parts

Application Support

Service

Application Support

Phone:

Fax:

PHONE NUMBER

1-800-437-1171

1-800-558-2040

1-800-682-5327 or

1-262-524-5698

1-800-668-0732

1-262-524-5300

1-262-524-5698

+33 (0) 130-831-300

(General Imaging and Cardiac)

+49 (0) 212-2802-652

+49 (0) 2122-8024-31

Tel:

Fax:

Phone:

Fax:

+65 6291-8528

+65-6291-7006

81-426-48-2940

81-426-48-2905

System manufacturer

Refer to Basic User Manual/User Guide for the information.

Please use the latest revision of the document.

Factory Site

Refer to Basic User Manual/User Guide for the information.

Please use the latest revision of the document.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

1-35

Introduction

1-36 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Chapter 2

Site Preparations

This chapter provides the information required to plan and prepare for the setup of an Ultrasound system and

Docking Cart. Included are descriptions of the facility and electrical needs to be met by the purchaser of the units.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

2-1

Site Preparations

Contents in this chapter

• ‘Overview’ on page 2-2

• ‘General requirements’ on page 2-3

• ‘Facility needs’ on page 2-12

• ‘Environmental Dangers’ on page 2-19

Overview

2-2 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

General requirements

General requirements

Contents in this Section

• ‘Ultrasound system environmental requirements’ on

page 2-3

• ‘Electrical requirements’ on page 2-6

• ‘Electrical requirements for Docking Cart’ on page 2-8

• ‘EMI limitations’ on page 2-9

• ‘EMI prevention/abatement’ on page 2-10

• ‘Probes environmental requirements’ on page 2-11

Ultrasound system environmental requirements

If the Ultrasound system is very cold or hot

When unpacking the Ultrasound system, allow the temperature of the Ultrasound system to stabilize before powering up. The following table describes guidelines for reaching operational temperatures from storage or transport temperatures.

CAUTION

If the Ultrasound system is very cold or hot, do not turn on its power until it has had a chance to acclimate to its operating environment.

Table 2-1: System Acclimation Time Chart

Degree C

50 45 40 35

Degree F

122 113 104 95

hours

4 2 0 0

30

86

0

25

77

0

20

68

0

15 10

59 50

0 0

5

41

2

0 -5

32 23

4 6

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

2-3

Site Preparations

Environmental specifications

Temperature

Humidity

Pressure

The system and Docking Cart should be operated, stored, or transported within the parameters outlined below. Either its operational environment must be constantly maintained or the unit must be turned off.

Table 2-2: System Environmental Requirements

Operational

(with probe)

10 - 40°C

50 - 104°F

30 - 75% non-condensing

700 - 1060hPa

Storage

LOGIQ e

-5 - 50°C

23 - 122°F

10 - 90% non-condensing

700 - 1060hPa

Transport

LOGIQ e

-5 - 50°C

23 - 122°F

10 - 90% non-condensing

700 - 1060hPa

Temperature

Humidity

Pressure

Table 2-3: Environmental Requirements for Docking Cart

Operation

10 - 40°C

50 - 104°F

30 - 75% non-condensing

700 - 1060hPa

Storage

-5 - 50°C

23 - 122°F

10 - 90% non-condensing

700 - 1060hPa

Transport

-5 - 50°C

23 - 122°F

10 - 90% non-condensing

700 - 1060hPa

2-4 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

General requirements

Environmental specifications (continued)

Table 2-4: Environmental Requirements for an Ultrasound Room for Docking Cart

Item

Power Source

Power Rating

Radiation Shielding

Floor Landing

Floor Condition

Weight

Refer to Table 2-6 on page 2-8 .

Values

500VA (100V-120V); 500VA (220-240V)

NONE REQUIRED for ULTRASOUND ENERGY

Approximately 680 - 800 kg/m

2 without Accessories

Gradient: WITHIN 5 degrees

53 kg without Accessories

NOTE: Temperature in degrees Celsius (ºC) conversion to degrees F (ºF): (ºF) = (ºC * 9/5) + 32

CAUTION

Ensure that the probe face temperature does not exceed the normal operation temperature range.

CAUTION

The LOGIQ e system and probe connector is not waterproof.

Do not expose the device to water or any kind of liquid.

Lighting

Bright light is needed for Ultrasound system installation, updates and repairs. However, operator and patient comfort may be optimized if the room light is subdued and indirect. Therefore a combination lighting system (dim/bright) is recommended. Keep in mind that lighting controls and dimmers can be a source of

EMI which could degrade image quality. These controls should be selected to minimize possible interference.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

2-5

Site Preparations

Electrical requirements

General requirements

NOTE: GE requires a dedicated power and ground for the proper operation of its Ultrasound equipment. This dedicated power shall originate at the last distribution panel before the Ultrasound system.

Sites with a mains power system with defined Neutral and Live:

The dedicated line shall consist of one phase, a neutral (not shared with any other circuit), and a full size ground wire from

the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet.

Sites with a mains power system without a defined Neutral:

The dedicated line shall consist of one phase (two lines), not shared with any other circuit, and a full size ground wire from the

distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet.

NOTE: Please note that image artifacts can occur, if at any time within the facility, the ground from the main facility's incoming power source to the Ultrasound system is only a conduit.

Electrical requirements for Adapter

Table 2-5: Electrical Specifications for Adapter

Adapter Model

Input Voltage

Input Current

Output Power

Output Voltage

Output Current

Frequency

AHM150PS19-XA1048

100-240VAC

1.5A at 115VAC

0.75A at 230VAC

150W

19.0VDC

7.89A

50/60Hz

2-6 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

General requirements

Site circuit breaker

CAUTION

Power outage may occur. The LOGIQ e requires a dedicated single branch circuit. To avoid circuit overload and possible loss of critical care equipment, make sure you do not have any other equipment operating on the same circuit.

It is recommended that the branch circuit breaker for the

Ultrasound system be readily accessible.

CAUTION

POWER OUTAGE MAY OCCURE.

The LOGIQ e requires a dedicated single branch circuit. To avoid circuit overload and possible loss of critical care equipment, make sure you DO NOT have any other equipment operating on the same circuit.

Site power outlets

A dedicated AC power outlet must be within reach of the

Ultrasound system without extension cords. Other outlets adequate for the external peripherals, medical and test equipment needed to support this Ultrasound system must also be present within 1 m (3.2 ft.) of the Ultrasound system.

Electrical installation must meet all current local, state, and national electrical codes.

Unit power plug

If the Ultrasound system arrives without a power plug, or with the wrong plug, you must contact your GE dealer or the installation engineer must supply what is locally required.

Power stability requirements

Voltage drop-out:

Max 10 ms.

Power transients:

Less than 25% of nominal peak voltage for less than 1 millisecond for any type of transient, including line frequency, synchronous, asynchronous, or aperiodic transients.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

2-7

Site Preparations

Electrical requirements for Docking Cart

PARAMETER

Voltage Range

Power

Line Frequency

Power Transients

Decaying Oscillation

Table 2-6: Electrical requirements for Docking Cart

AREA

100-240V~

All applications

All applications

All applications

All applications

LIMITS

350VA

More than or equal to 750 VA

50/60Hz ( ±2Hz)

Less than 25% of nominal peak voltage for less than 1 millisecond for any type of transient, including line frequency, synchronous, asynchronous, or aperiodic transients.

Less than 15% of peak voltage for less than 1 millisecond.

2-8 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

General requirements

EMI limitations

Ultrasound systems are susceptible to Electromagnetic

Interference (EMI) from radio frequencies, magnetic fields, and transients in the air or wiring. They also generate EMI. The

Ultrasound system complies with limits as stated on the EMC label. However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.

Possible EMI sources should be identified before the Ultrasound system is installed.

Electrical and electronic equipment may produce EMI unintentionally as the result of a defect. Some of these sources include:

• scanners

• computers

• monitors

• fans

• in-house wireless phones (DECT phones)

• wireless computer keyboard and mouse

• air conditioning system

• High Frequency (HF) surgery equipment

The presence of a broadcast station or broadcast van may also cause interference.

See: ‘EMI prevention/abatement’ on page 2-10 for EMI prevention tips.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

2-9

Site Preparations

EMI prevention/abatement

EMI RULE

Be aware of Radio

Frequency sources

Ground the

Ultrasound system

Replace all screws,

Radio Frequency gaskets, covers, cores

Replace broken

Radio Frequency gaskets

Do not place labels where Radio

Frequency gaskets touch metal

Use GE specified harnesses and peripherals

Take care with cellular phones

Properly route peripheral cables

Table 2-7: EMI prevention/abatement

DETAILS

• Keep the Ultrasound system at least 5 meters (15 feet) away from other EMI sources.

• Special shielding may be required to eliminate interference problems caused by high frequency, high powered radio or video broadcast signals.

Poor grounding is the most likely reason an Ultrasound system will have noisy images. Check grounding of the power cord and power outlet.

• After you finish repairing or updating the Ultrasound system, replace all covers and tighten all screws.

• Any cable with an external connection requires a magnet wrap at each end.

• Install all covers. Loose or missing covers or Radio Frequency gaskets allow radio frequencies to interfere with the ultrasound signals.

If more than 20% or a pair of the fingers on an Radio Frequency gasket are broken, replace the gasket. Do not turn on the Ultrasound system until any loose metallic part is removed.

Where applicable, never place a label where Radio Frequency gaskets meet the

Ultrasound system. Otherwise, the gap created will permit Radio Frequency leakage. Or, if a label has been found in such a position, move the label.

The interconnect cables are grounded and require ferrite beads and other shielding. Also, cable length, material, and routing are all important; do not change from what is specified.

Cellular phones may transmit a 5 V/m signal; that could cause image artifacts.

Where applicable, do not allow cables to lie across the top of the Card Rack or hang out of the peripheral bays. Loop the excess length for peripheral cables inside the peripheral bays. Attach the monitor cables to the frame.

2-10 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

General requirements

Probes environmental requirements

Operation and storage temperatures for probes

Table 2-8: Operation and storage temperatures for probes

Conditions

Operation:

Temperature

10 to 40 ºC (50 to 104 ºF)

Storage: -5 to 50 ºC (23 to 122 ºF)

Temperature in degrees Celsius (ºC) conversion to degrees F (ºF):

(ºF) = (ºC * 9/5) + 32

NOTE: SYSTEMS AND ELECTRONIC PROBES ARE DESIGNED

FOR STORAGE TEMPERATURES OF -5 TO + 50 degrees C.

WHEN EXPOSED TO LARGE TEMPERATURE VARIATIONS,

THE PRODUCT SHOULD BE KEPT IN ROOM

TEMPERATURE FOR 10 HOURS BEFORE USE.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

2-11

Site Preparations

Facility needs

Purchaser responsibilities

The work and materials needed to prepare the site is the responsibility of the purchaser. Delay, confusion, and waste of manpower can be avoided by completing pre-installation work before delivery. Purchaser responsibility includes:

• Procuring the materials required

• Completing the preparations before delivery of the

Ultrasound system

• Paying the costs for any alterations and modifications not specifically provided in the sales contract

NOTE: All electrical installations that are preliminary to the positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment must be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations, and testing must also be performed by qualified personnel. The products involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are highly sophisticated and special engineering competence is required. All electrical work on these products must comply with the requirements of applicable electrical codes. The purchaser of GE equipment must only utilize qualified personnel to perform electrical servicing on the equipment.

The desire to use a non–listed or customer provided product or to place an approved product further from the Ultrasound system than the interface kit allows, presents challenges to the installation team. To avoid delays during installation, such variances should be made known to the individuals or group performing the installation at the earliest possible date

(preferably prior to the purchase).

The ultrasound suite must be clean prior to delivery of the

Ultrasound system. Carpet is not recommended because it collects dust and creates static. Potential sources of EMI

(electromagnetic interference) should also be investigated before delivery. Dirt, static, and EMI can negatively impact

Ultrasound system reliability.

2-12 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Facility needs

Required facility needs

NOTE: GE requires a dedicated power and ground for the proper operation of its Ultrasound equipment. This dedicated power shall originate at the last distribution panel before the Ultrasound system.

Sites with a mains power system with defined Neutral and Live:

The dedicated line shall consist of one phase, a neutral (not shared with any other circuit), and a full size ground wire from

the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet.

Sites with a mains power system without a defined Neutral:

The dedicated line shall consist of one phase (two lines), not shared with any other circuit, and a full size ground wire from the

distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet.

NOTE: Please note that image artifacts can occur, if at any time within the facility, the ground from the main facility's incoming power source to the Ultrasound unit is only a conduit.

• Dedicated single branch power outlet of adequate amperage meeting all local and national codes which is located less than 2.5 m (8 ft.) from the unit’s proposed location

• Door opening is at least 76 cm (30 in) wide

• Proposed location for unit is at least 0.2m (0.67 ft.) from the wall for cooling

• Power outlet and place for any external peripheral are within

2 m (6.5 ft.) of each other with peripheral within 1 m of the unit to connect cables.

• Power outlets for other medical equipment and gel warmer

• Power outlets for test equipment and modem within 1 m (3.2 ft.) of unit

• Clean and protected space to store transducers (in their cases or on a rack)

• Material to safely clean probes (done with a plastic container, never metal)

For the amperage requirements, see: ‘Electrical requirements’ on page 2-6 .

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

2-13

Site Preparations

Desirable features

• Door is at least 92 cm (3 ft.) wide

• Circuit breaker for dedicated power outlet is easily accessible

• Sink with hot and cold water

• Receptacle for bio–hazardous waste, like used probe sheaths

• Storage for linens and equipment

• Nearby waiting room, lavatory, and dressing room

• Dual level lighting (bright and dim)

• Lockable cabinet ordered by GE for its software and proprietary manuals

2-14 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Facility needs

Suggested and Alternate Ultrasound Room Layout

Recommended standard floor plan and a minimal floor plan for ultrasound equipment:

DE DIC AT E D

P O WE R

R E C EP TA C LE

18 IN .

(46 C M)

LINEN SUPPLY

C O NS O LE

F IL M VIE WE R

C O UN T E R TO P

F OOT

S W

S TOO L

SIN K

76 IN .

(193 C M)

F IL M VIE WE R

F IL M SUPPLIES

SIN K

SU C T IO N LINE

E ME R G E C Y

OX Y G EN

24 IN .

(61 C M)

SE CR E TA R YS O R

DO C TO R ' S DES K

O VE R HE A D

LI G HT S DIMME R

P AT IEN T

TO ILE T

F A C ILI T Y

DOO R

42 IN .

(107 C M)

A 14 by 17 foot R ecommended F loor P lan

S cale : E ach square equals one square foot

LINEN SUPPLY

P R OB ES /SUPPLIES

E XT E R NA L

PE R IP HE R A LS

S TOO L

F OOT

S W

L O G IQ B oo k X P

C ONS OLE

DE DIC AT E D P O WE R

O UT LE T S

24 IN .

(61 C M)

E XAM IN A R IO N

TAB LE

76 IN .

(193 C M)

DOO R

30 IN .

(76 C M)

A n 8 by 10 foot Minimal F loor P lan

G E C AB INE T

F OT S O F T WA R E

A ND MA NU A LS

Figure 2-1. Suggested Ultrasound Room Layout

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

2-15

Site Preparations

Networking setup requirements

Stand alone Ultrasound system (without network connection)

None.

Scanner connected to hospital’s network

Supported networks:

Wireless LAN

Purpose of the DICOM network function

DICOM services provide the operator with clinically useful features for moving images and patient information over a hospital network.

Examples of DICOM services include the transfer of images to workstations for viewing or transferring images to remote printers.

As an added benefit, transferring images in this manner frees up the on-board monitor and peripherals, enabling viewing to be done while scanning continues.

With DICOM, images can be archived, stored, and retrieved faster, easier, and at a lower cost.

2-16 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Facility needs

DICOM option setup requirements

To configure the Ultrasound system to work with other network connections, the site’s network administrator must provide information to complete the form “Worksheet for DICOM

Network Information in ” Figure 2-2 on page 2-18 . Ensure that there are no spaces in any field of the form.

Entries must include:

• A host name, local port number, AE Title, IP address and

Net Mask for the Ultrasound system.

• The IP addresses for the default gateway and other routers at the site for ROUTING INFORMATION.

• The host name, IP address, port and AE Title for each device the site wants connected to the Ultrasound system for DICOM APPLICATION INFORMATION. A field for the make (manufacturer) and the revision of the device, is also included. This information may be useful for error solving.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

2-17

Site Preparations

DICOM option setup requirements (continued)

2-18

Figure 2-2. Worksheet for DICOM Network Information

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Environmental Dangers

Environmental Dangers

Commercial devices such as laser cameras, printers, VCRs and external monitors, usually exceed allowable leakage current limits and, when plugged into separate AC outlets, are in violation of patient safety standards. Suitable electrical isolation of such external AC outlets, or providing the device with extra protective earth, will be required in order to meet IEC60601-1 standards for electrical leakage.

Patient Environment IEC60601-1and ANSI AAMI ES60601-1

Sub Clause 3.79 and figure A.9 (IEC60601-1:2005 and ANSI AAMI

ES60601-1:2005)

Such an area is an environment in which medical diagnosis, monitoring or treatment is carried out. It is very difficult to attach unique dimensions to the PATIENT

ENVIROMENT.

In practice a distance of 2,5 m (8.2 ft.) above the floor on which the medical personnel stand and a horizontal distance of 1,5 m (4.9 ft.) have justified themselves as indicative of the dimensions of the Patient Environment.

The patient environment/vicinity will be depicted as a dashed line in this procedure.

See example below.

Figure 2-3. Patient environment

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

2-19

Site Preparations

2-20 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Chapter 3

System Setup

This chapter contains information needed to install

LOGIQ e system.

Included is a procedure that describes how to receive and unpack the equipment and how to file a damage or loss claim.

How to prepare the facility and unit of the actual installation, and how to check and test the unit, probes, and external peripherals for electrical safety are also included in this procedure.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

3-1

System Setup

Overview

Contents in this chapter

• ‘Overview’ on page 3-2

• ‘Setup reminders’ on page 3-3

• ‘Receiving and unpacking the equipment’ on page 3-6

• ‘Preparing for setup’ on page 3-12

• ‘Completing the setup’ on page 3-13

• ‘System Configuration’ on page 3-20

• ‘Connectivity setup’ on page 3-31

• ‘Paperwork after setup’ on page 3-33

• ‘Peripherals Installation Instructions’ on page 3-38

3-2 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Setup reminders

Setup reminders

Contents in this Section

• ‘Average setup time’ on page 3-3

• ‘Setup warnings’ on page 3-3

Average setup time

• Unpacking the LOGIQ e: 20 minutes

• Set up LOGIQ e wo/options: 30 minutes

• DICOM Network Configuration: 30 minutes

The LOGIQ e installation and functional checkout will take approximately one hour. LOGIQ e consoles with optional equipment may take slightly longer.

Setup warnings

DANGER

WHEN USING ANY TEST INSTRUMENT THAT IS CAPABLE

OF OPENING THE AC GROUND LINE (I.E., METER’S

GROUND SWITCH IS OPEN), DON’T TOUCH THE

ULTRASOUND SYSTEM!

CAUTION

To prevent electrical shock, connect the unit to a properly grounded power outlet. Do not use a three to two prong adapter. This defeats safety grounding.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

3-3

System Setup

Setup warnings (continued)

CAUTION

Do not wear the ESD wrist strap when you work on live circuits and more than 30 V peak is present.

CAUTION

NOTE:

Do not operate this unit unless all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. System performance and cooling require this.

1. There are no operator serviceable components. To prevent shock, do not remove any covers or panels. Should problems or malfunctions occur, unplug the power cord.

Only qualified service personnel should carry out servicing.

For information regarding packing labels, refer to LABELS

ON PACKAGE.

2. After being transported, the unit may be very cold or hot. If this is the case, allow the unit to acclimate before you turn it on. It requires one hour for each 2.5×C increment it's temperature is below 10×C or above 40×C.

DANGER

Equipment damage possibility. Turning the system on without acclimation after arriving at site may cause the system to be damaged.

CAUTION

If the Ultrasound system is very cold or hot, do not turn on its power until it has had a chance to acclimate to its operating environment.

The following table describes guidelines for reaching operational temperatures from storage or transport temperatures.

3-4 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Setup reminders

Setup warnings (continued)

DANGER

WHEN USING ANY TEST INSTRUMENT THAT IS

CAPABLE OF OPENING THE AC GROUND LINE

(I.E., METER’S GROUND SWITCH IS OPEN),

DON’T TOUCH THE UNIT!

DANGER

To prevent electrical shock, connect the unit to a properly grounded power outlet. Do not use a three to two prong adapter. This defeats safety grounding.

DANGER

Do not operate this unit unless all board covers are securely in place.

CAUTION

CAUTION

Operator Manual(s)

The User Manual(s) should be fully read and understood before operating the LOGIQ e and kept near the Ultrasound system for quick reference.

Acoustic Output Hazard

Although the ultrasound energy transmitted from the LOGIQ e probe is within AIUM/NEMA standards, avoid unnecessary exposure. ultrasound energy can produce heat and mechanical damage.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

3-5

System Setup

Receiving and unpacking the equipment

Contents in this Section

• ‘Receiving the LOGIQ e’ on page 3-6

• ‘Unpacking the LOGIQ e’ on page 3-7

• ‘Moving into Position’ on page 3-10

Receiving the LOGIQ e

Overview

Improper handling during transportation may harm the equipment inside the package even if the package itself is undamaged.

Examine all packages

Examine package closely at time of delivery, as described in the procedure below.

3-6 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Receiving and unpacking the equipment

Unpacking the LOGIQ e

When a new system arrives, check that any components are not damaged and are not in short supply. If shipping damage or shortage occurs, contact the address shown in Chapter 1

1. Cut the four PLASTIC BANDs

2. Cut the adhesive tape and open top covers of paper carton.

Adhesive tape

Plastic Bands

1

2

Figure 3-1. Open Top Covers of Paper Carton

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

3-7

System Setup

Unpacking the LOGIQ e (continued)

3. Take out the Paper pad.

4. Take out console together with 2 interleavers from console package.

5. Take out the interleavers beside Accessories Package

6. Take out Accessories Package.

Paper Pad

Console and interleavers

Console Package

Accessories Package

3-8

CAUTION

Figure 3-2. Unpacking the equipment

Do not lift the unit by the rubber band. Equipment damage may result.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Receiving and unpacking the equipment

Unpacking the LOGIQ e (continued)

7. Remove 2 interleavers.

Interleaver

Console

Figure 3-3. Removing interleavers and plastic bag

Interleaver

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

3-9

System Setup

Unpacking the LOGIQ e (continued)

NOTE: Check the shipping container for special instructions. Verify that the container is intact. In some cases a secondary container may be used. If so, ask the carrier for unpacking instructions.

CAUTION

Moving into Position

Figure 3-4. Labels on Package

Please carefully unpack the system, and do not dispose the package of LOGIQ e, so that it can be reused for service.

CAUTION

Do not lift the unit by the rubber band. Use handle to move system.

CAUTION

Equipment Damage Possibility. Lifting the console by holding covers may damage the covers. Do not lift the console by holding any covers.

In general, a single adult can move the LOGIQ e. Before moving, store all loose parts in original accessory box or in back pack. Return probes to original box.

3-10 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Receiving and unpacking the equipment

Packing the Equipment

Please pack LOGIQ e in the reverse order of unpacking.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

3-11

System Setup

Preparing for setup

Verify customer order

Compare items received by the customer to that which is listed on the delivery order. Report any items that are missing, back ordered, or damaged.

Physical inspection

System Voltage Settings

Verify that the system arrived intact (visual inspection).

If the system has been damaged, please refer to ‘Damage in transportation’ on page i-11 in the beginning of this manual.

• Verify that the scanner is set to the correct voltage. The

Voltage settings for the LOGIQ e Scanner is found on a label located on the AC adapter.

220-240VAC(Europe, Latin America).

WARNING

Connecting a

LOGIQ e

system to the wrong voltage level will most likely destroy the scanner.

EMI protection

The LOGIQ e has been designed to minimize the effects of

Electro-Magnetic Interference (EMI). Many of the covers, shields, and screws are provided primarily to protect the system from image artifacts caused by this interference. For this reason, it is imperative that all covers and hardware are installed and secured before the unit is put into operation.

See ‘EMI limitations’ on page 2-9 for more information about

EMI protection.

3-12 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Completing the setup

Completing the setup

Contents in this Section

• ‘System specifications’ on page 3-13

• ‘Electrical specifications’ on page 3-14

• ‘Power On / Boot Up’ on page 3-15

• ‘Power Off/Shutdown’ on page 3-17

• ‘Connecting probes’ on page 3-18

System specifications

System requirements verification

Physical dimensions

• Verify that the site meets the requirements listed in

Chapter 2.

(See: ‘Facility needs’ on page 2-12 .)

• Verify that the specifications below don’t conflict with any on-site conditions.

The physical dimensions vary from product to product. You may copy and use the table below in your local manuals or local core content.

• Height: 70 mm (2.75 in) console only; 100 mm (3.94 in) with handle

• Length: 346 mm (13.62 in) console only; 375 mm (14.76 in) with handle

• Width: 295 mm (11.61 in) console only; 343 mm (13.50 in) with handle

Console Weight

• Weight (with battery): approx. 5.2 kg (11.5 lbs)

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

3-13

System Setup

Electrical specifications

WARNING

Connecting a LOGIQ e to the wrong voltage level will most likely destroy it.

Verification of the system’s voltage setting

Verify that the mains voltage specified for the LOGIQ e is available on-site.

Electrical specifications for LOGIQ e

3-14

Figure 3-5. AC Adapter label

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Completing the setup

Power On / Boot Up

NOTE: After turning off a system, wait at least ten seconds before turning it on again. The system may not be able to boot if power is recycled too quickly.

System Power On

Lower the handle. Plug the AC adapter output connector into the system DC input port (located on the system’s rear panel) with the arrow side upward. Plug the AC adapter power cord into a grounded, protective earth outlet

ＵＰ ＵＰ

CAUTION

Figure 3-6. Connect AC adapter

When power is applied to the system, power is distributed to the

Cooling Unit, Control Panel, LCD, Peripherals and the Back-end

Processor.

The system should rest on the handle to allow an air gap to prevent overheating.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

3-15

System Setup

Power on the system

Press the Power On/Off switch at the front of the system once.

Figure 3-7. Power On/Off Switch

When the Power On/Off switch on the Control Panel is pressed once, the Back-end Processor starts and the software code is distributed to initiate the scanner.

No status messages are displayed during this process.

3-16 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Completing the setup

Power Off/Shutdown

NOTE: After turning off a system, wait at least ten seconds before turning it on again. The system may not be able to boot if power is recycled too quickly.

Back-end Processor Power off

To power off the system: once.

2. The system-Exit window is displayed.

System Shutdown

Figure 3-8. System Exit Window

3. Using the Trackball or Select key, select Shutdown.

4. The shutdown process takes a few seconds and is complete when the power status LED is turned off.

5. Disconnect the probes.Clean or disinfect all probes as necessary. Store them in their shipping cases to avoid damage.

6. Close LCD cover.

Disconnect the Mains Power Cable if necessary. For example:

Relocating the system.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

3-17

System Setup

Connecting probes

Connect a probe

NOTE: It is not necessary to turn OFF power to connect or disconnect a probe.

CAUTION

Do not allow the probe head to hang freely. Excessive impact to the probe will result in irreparable damage.

CAUTION

To prevent probe connector pins damage, or PCB board damage, do not use excessive force when connecting the probes.

CAUTION

Keep the probe cables away from the wheels.

Do not bend the probe cables.

Do not cross cables between probes.

Follow these steps to connect a probe:

Probes can be connected at any time, whether the unit is On or

Off.

Carefully open the system LCD display, plug the probe connector into the probe port, then lock the probe latch upward.

NOTE: Please ensure that the probe latch is in an unlocked position before you connect the probe to the system.

1. Before connecting the probe: a. Do a visual check of the probe pins and system sockets.

b. Remove any dust or foam rests from the probe pins.

c. Verify the probe and the probe cable for any visual damage.

3-18 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Completing the setup

Connect a probe (continued)

2. Position the probe cable so that it is not resting on the floor.

Probe Latch

Figure 3-9. Probe connectors

Disconnect a probe

Follow these steps to disconnect a probe:

1. Remove the connector from the port.

2. Ensure that the probe head is clean before placing the probe in its storage case.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

3-19

System Setup

System Configuration

Contents in this Section

• ‘LOGIQ e configuration’ on page 3-21

• ‘Electrical requirements for Adapter’ on page 3-22

• ‘Approved peripherals’ on page 3-22

• ‘Connecting Cables’ on page 3-24

• ‘Peripheral/Accessories Connector Panel’ on page 3-25

• ‘Pin Assignment’ on page 3-26

• ‘Available probes’ on page 3-30

• ‘Software Options configuration’ on page 3-31

3-20 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

System Configuration

LOGIQ e configuration

System Specification

Console

Only

Height

Console with

Handle

70

2.75

100

3.94

The physical dimensions of the LOGIQ e console with old LCD are summarized as below:

Table 3-1: Physical Dimensions of LOGIQ e

Console

Only

Width

Console with

Handle

295

11.61

343

13.50

Console

Only

346

13.62

Depth

Console with

Handle

375

14.76

Unit

Unit

mm inches

Figure 3-10. Overall Dimensions and Weight

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

3-21

System Setup

Electrical requirements for Adapter

Table 3-2: Electrical Specifications for Adapter

Adapter Model

Input Voltage

Input Current

Output Power

Output Voltage

Output Current

Frequency

AHM150PS19-XA1048

100-240VAC

1.5A at 115VAC

0.75A at 230VAC

150W

19.0VDC

7.89A

50/60Hz

Approved peripherals

Device

B/W Printer

Color Printer

DVD RW

3-pedal footswitch

USB Wireless Card

Table 3-3: Approved peripherals

Manufacturer

SONY

SONY

Mitsubishi

SONY

LITEON

LITEON

Steute

NetGear

NetGear

NetGear

EDIMAX

Model Interface

UP-D897 B/W

Printer

UP-D898MD B/W

Printer

P95DW

USB1.1 Port

USB1.1 Port

UP-D25MD Color

Printer

USB1.1 Port

USB1.1 Port

LITEON eUAU108 USB Port

LITEON eBAU108 USB Port

MKF 2-MED GP26 USB Port

NetGear

WNA1000M

Wireless USB

Micro Adapter

USB Port

USB Port I-O DATA

WN-G300U

NetGear

WNA3100M

Wireless USB

Micro Adapter

USB Port

AC1200 Wireless

Dual-Band USB

Adapter

USB Port

Remark

For R8.x.x only

For R8.x.x only

For R9.x.x only

3-22 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Device

ECG-USB

Barcode Scanner

System Configuration

Table 3-3: Approved peripherals

Manufacturer

NORAV

Honeywell

Model

ECGUSB1D-EX

XENON 1900

Interface

USB Port

USB Port

Remark

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

3-23

System Setup

Connecting Cables

WARNING

Name

USB Cable

Equipment damage possibility. Be sure to use the following recommended connecting cables to connect recording devices and a network with LOGIQ e console.

Part No.

Table 3-4: List of Connecting Cables

Figure NOTE

For USB Printer &

USB DVD-RW

3-24 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

System Configuration

Peripheral/Accessories Connector Panel

LOGIQ e peripherals and accessories can be properly connected using the side connector panel.

Figure 3-11. Left Side and Rear Connector Panel

1. 3 USB Ports for Printers (B/W, Color and USB), Memory

Stick, Footswitch, DVD-RW, Wireless LAN Adapter, USB

Hub, USB HDD, ECG

4. Port for DC In (AC Adapter)

NOTE: Each outer (case) ground line of peripheral/accessory connectors are protectively grounded. Signal ground lines are not isolated.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

3-25

System Setup

Pin Assignment

Pin Assignment of DC in put

Connector: 4 Pin, Female

1

2

Table 3-5: Pin Assignment of DC input

Pin No.

Signal

+20V

+20V

3

4

Pin No.

Signal

GND

GND

Pin Assignment of USB1

1

2

Table 3-6: Pin Assignment of USB1

Pin No.

Signal

+5VDC

DATA-

3

4

Pin No.

Signal

DATA+

GND

Pin Assignment of USB2

1

2

Table 3-7: Pin Assignment of USB2

Pin No.

Signal

+5VDC

DATA-

3

4

Pin No.

Signal

DATA+

GND

Pin Assignment of USB3

1

2

Table 3-8: Pin Assignment of USB3

Pin No.

Signal

+5VDC

DATA-

3

4

Pin No.

Signal

DATA+

GND

3-26 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

System Configuration

Pin Assignment of External HDMI

Table 3-9: Pin Assignment of HDMI

7

8

5

6

9

10

3

4

1

2

Pin No.

Signal

TMDS Data2+

TMDS Data2 Shield

TMDS Data2-

TMDS Data1+

TMDS Data1 Shield

TMDS Data1-

TMDS Data0+

TMDS Data0 Shield

TMDS Data0-

TMDS Clock+

15

16

17

18

19

11

Pin No.

12

13

14

Signal

TMDS Clock Shield

TMDS Clock-

CEC

Reserved (N.C. on device)

SCL

SDA

DDC/CEC Ground

+5V Power

Hot Plug Detect

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

3-27

System Setup

Peripheral Connection

No.

NOTE: Please refer to the operation manual of each peripheral for information needed by the user to operate the system safely.

To install the peripherals, See ‘Peripherals Installation’ on

page 3-34 for more information.

Table 3-10: Peripheral Connection

Steps Corresponding Graphic

Connect the DVD-RW to the system.

The DVD-RW can be properly connected using either of the 3 USB ports.

NOTE: Do not connect the DVD-RW to the system while scanning.

Connect the footswitch to the system.

The footswitch can be properly connected using either of the 3 USB ports.

3. Connect SD Card.

Connect SD Card to the system. Insert the SD Card into the SD Card port.

4. Connect Wireless LAN Adapter.

Connect the Wireless LAN Adapter to the system. The wireless LAN adapter can be properly connected using either of the 3 USB ports.

3-28 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

No.

5.

System Configuration

Table 3-10: Peripheral Connection

Steps

Connect Color Printer.

Connect the Color Printer to the system.

The Color Printer can be properly connected using either of the 3 USB ports.

Corresponding Graphic

Connect the ECG to the system. The

ECG can be properly connected using either of the 3 USB ports.

7. Connect Barcode Reader.

Connect the Barcode Reader to the system. The Barcode Reader can be properly connected using either of the 3

USB ports.

Connect the external monitor to the system. The monitor can be properly connected using the HDMI port.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

3-29

System Setup

Probe Name

C1-5-RS

E8C-RS

8C-RS

12L-RS

3SC-RS

9L-RS

6S-RS

L4-12t-RS

L8-18i-RS

L10-22-RS

4C-RS

LK760-RS

6Tc-RS

Available probes

Material of

Headshell

NORYL

VALOX

VALOX

NORYL

VALOX

VALOX

VALOX

VALOX

VALOX

VALOX

VALOX

VALOX

VALOX

See in specification in the LOGIQ e User Reference Manual for

Probes and intended use.

The LOGIQ e system (Software R8.x.x) supports C1-5-RS,

8C-RS, 9L-RS, 12L-RS, L4-12t-RS, L8-18i-RS, L10-22-RS,

E8C-RS, 3Sc-RS and 6S-RS probes.

The LOGIQ e system (Software R9.x.x) supports C1-5-RS,

8C-RS, 4C-RS, 9L-RS, 12L-RS, L4-12t-RS, L8-18i-RS,

L10-22-RS, LK760-RS, E8C-RS, 3Sc-RS, 6S-RS and 6Tc-RS probes.

Table 3-11: List of Probes for LOGIQ e

CONVEX

TYPE

MICRO-CONVEX

MICRO-CONVEX

LINEAR

Phased Array

LINEAR

SECTOR

LINEAR

LINEAR

LINEAR

CONVEX

LINEAR

SECTOR

Catalog

Number

H40462LA

Part

Number

5384875

H40402LN

H40402LS

H40402LY

H45041DL

H40442LL

H45021RP

H48062AB

H40462LF

5434195

5434194

5409291

47237516

5213143

5394465

5435010

5397810

H48312AH 5441887

H4000SR 5488477

H44901AF KN100106

H45551ZE 5548914

NOTE: Please refer to User Manual for the applications of the probes.

3-30 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

System Configuration

Software Options configuration

Software Option installation introduction

Refer to the LOGIQ e Basic User Manual, Chapter 16,

Customizing Your System for information on configuring items like Hospital, Department, Language, Units (of measure), Date,

Time and Date Format.

For information on configuring Software Options, Refer to the

LOGIQ e Basic User Manual, Chapter 16, Customizing Your

System.

For information on configuring DICOM Connectivity, Refer to the

LOGIQ e Basic User Manual, Chapter 16, Customizing Your

System.

Connectivity setup

To be able to use the network functions when connected to a hospital network, the scanner must have a proper network address.

• Before you can set up the scanner, you need to collect some information.

• The Worksheet can be used for gathering this information.

• Typical source for this information is the network administrator.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

3-31

System Setup

Connectivity setup (continued)

Site System Information

Site:

Dept:

LOGIQ SN:

Type:

Floor:

Room:

REV:

CONTACT INFORMATION

Name Title

Phone

Comments:

E-Mail Address

TCP/IP Settings

Name - AE Title:

IP Settings

IP Address:

Subnet Mask:

Default Gateway:

Remote Archive Setup

Remote Archive IP:

Remote Archive Name:

Services (Destination Devices)

Manufacturer

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

9

10

11

12

Device Type Name IP Address Port

Figure 3-12. Connectivity Installation Worksheet

AE Title

3-32 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Paperwork after setup

Paperwork after setup

NOTE: During and after setup, the documentation (i.e. CDs with documentation, User Manuals, Installation Manuals, etc.) for the

LOGIQ e and the peripherals must be kept as part of the original

Ultrasound system documentation. This ensures that all relevant safety and user information is available during the operation and service of the complete Ultrasound system.

User’s Manual(s)

User Check that the correct User Manual(s) for the system and software revision, is included with the installation. Specific language versions of the User Manual may also be available.

Check with your GE Sales Representative for availability.

Product Locator Installation Card

NOTE: The Product Locator Installation Card shown may not be the same as the provided Product Locator card.

Figure 3-13. Product Locator Installation Card (Example)

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

3-33

System Setup

Peripherals Installation

Contents in this Section

• ‘Overview’ on page 3-35

• ‘Furnished materials’ on page 3-36

• ‘Peripherals Installation Instructions’ on page 3-38

• ‘Color USB Printer Installation’ on page 3-38

• ‘DVD-RW Installation’ on page 3-41

• ‘Wireless Lan Adapter Installation’ on page 3-43

• ‘Footswitch Installation’ on page 3-61

• ‘Barcode Scanner Installation’ on page 3-63

• ‘ECG Installation’ on page 3-66

• ‘ECG Intended Use’ on page 3-67

• ‘Technical Specification of ECG’ on page 3-68

3-34 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Peripherals Installation

Overview

Description

B/W USB Printer

Color USB Printer

DVD-RW

3-Pedal

Footswitch

USB Wireless

Adapter

This section describes how to install and configure the peripherals validated for the LOGIQ e.

About the operation check-out of peripherals, See ‘Peripheral

Checks’ on page 4-52 for more information.

Table 3-12: LOGIQ e Peripherals

Power

100-120VAC/240VAC

50/60Hz 1.5a/0.8A

100-120VAC/240VAC

50/60Hz

1.3A/0.6A

100-120VAC/240VAC

50/60Hz

1.5-0.8A

100-240VAC

50/60hZ

1.7/1.0A

100-240VAC

1.5A

100-240VAC

1.5A

5V

Control

USB port

USB port

USB port

USB port

USB port

USB port

USB port

UP-D897

UP-D898MD

P95DW (For R8.x.x only)

UP-D25MD eUAU108 eBAU108

Model

MKF 2-MED GP26

USB port

Barcode Scanner

ECG USB 5V 80mA

USB port

USB port

USB port

USB port

USB port

NetGear WNA1000M Wireless

USB Micro Adapter

I-O DATA WN-G300U (For R8.x.x only)

NetGear WNA3100M Wireless

USB Micro Adapter

AC1200 Wireless Dual-Band USB

Adapter (For R9.x.x only)

XENON1900

ECGUSB1D-EX

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

3-35

System Setup

Furnished materials

Item

3

4

1

2

This section describes the materials furnished with the

Peripherals and with the system.

Retain the original carton and packing materials in case transport is needed in the future.

• UP-D898MD B/W Printer

Table 3-13: Materials furnished with B/W Printer

Description

UP-D898MD B/W Printer

Paper Roll

USB cable

AC Power Cord

Quantity

1

1

1

1

Note

Item

1

2

3

4

• Color USB Printer

Table 3-14: Materials furnished with Color USB Printer

Description

UP-D25MD Color USB Printer

Paper Roll

AC Power Cord

USB cable

Quantity

1

1

1

1

Note

Item

1

2

• DVD-RW (LITEON DVD-RW)

Table 3-15: Materials furnished with DVD-RW

Description

DVD-RW

USB cable

Quantity

1

1

Note

3-36 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Peripherals Installation

Furnished materials (continued)

Item

1

Table 3-16: Materials furnished with the Wireless LAN

Description

Wireless Adapter

Quantity

1

Note

Item

1

Table 3-17: Materials furnished with the Footswitch

Description

Footswitch

Quantity

1

Note

Table 3-18: Materials furnished with the Barcode Scanner

Item

1

Description

Barcode Scanner

Quantity

1

Note

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

3-37

System Setup

Peripherals Installation Instructions

Color USB Printer Installation

Tools

No special tools needed.

Manpower

One person 5 minutes.

Preparations

1. Unpack the Color USB Printer.

Installation Procedure

1. Place the device in a suitable place.

2. Connect power cord and USB Cable on the Printer.

3-38

Figure 3-14. Color Printer USB cable and Power Cord connect

3. Connect the power cord to the outlet on the wall, then turn on the printer.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Peripherals Installation

Color USB Printer Installation (continued)

4. Connect USB cable to LOGIQ e USB port.

Figure 3-15. Color Printer connection

Setting up Color printer for Printing Report

1. Connect the color printer to the USB port of the system.

2. Power on the printer and the system.

3. After the system completes booting up, enter Utility ->

System -> Peripherals, select UP-D25MD for Standard

Printer.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Figure 3-16. Peripheral Page

3-39

System Setup

Assigning Printer Key to the Printer

Example below assign P2 on the control panel to Color Printer

UP-D25MD.

1. Select Connectivity -> Service, select Standard Print in the

Service list.

Figure 3-17. Service Page

2. Select Connectivity -> Button, select Print2 in Print Button list, then select the original setting in Printflow View field and select “<<“.

3-40

Figure 3-18. Button Page

3. Select Standard Print, then press “>>“ to add the standard printer to the Printflow View.

Figure 3-19. Standard Print setting

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Peripherals Installation

DVD-RW Installation

Tools

No special tools needed.

Manpower

One person 5 minutes.

Preparations

2. Ensure no physical damage.

Installation Procedure

1. Place the device in a suitable place.

2. Connect the USB Cable on the DVD-RW.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Figure 3-20. Connect USB cable on DVD-RW

3-41

System Setup

DVD-RW Installation (continued)

3. Connect USB cable to LOGIQ e USB port.

Figure 3-21. DVD-RW connection

WARNING

Do Not connect DVD-RW with the system while scanning.

3-42 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Peripherals Installation

Wireless Lan Adapter Installation

Tools

No special tools needed.

Manpower

One person 5 minutes.

Preparations

1. Unpack the Wireless LAN Adapter.

2. Ensure no physical damage.

Installation Procedure

1. Connect the Wireless LAN Adapter to the USB port on the

LOGIQ e system.

Figure 3-22. Connect Wireless LAN Adapter to the system

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

3-43

System Setup

Wireless Lan Adapter Installation (continued)

Configuration to configure wireless network.

Figure 3-23. Wireless configuration

3. Config the wireless Lan setting with local IT person.

3-44 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Peripherals Installation

Configuring the Wireless Network (Option)

A Wireless Network (WLAN) is available on the LOGIQ e. When the WLAN is active, an icon appears in the status bar to indicate whether the WLAN is installed or disconnected.

Wireless LAN (WLAN) Specifications

The Wireless LAN (WLAN) supports the following network protocols

Wireless LAN (WLAN) Specifications for Software R8.x.x

Security (Encryption)

• WPA2-PSK [AES], WPA-PSK [AES/TKIP], and 40bit (also called 64-bit) and 128-bit WEP data encryption

Radio Data Rate

• Up to 150 Mbps----NETGEAR WNA1000M

• Up to 300 Mbps---I-O DATA WN-G300U

Frequency

• 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz

WPA-Enterprise

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

3-45

System Setup

Wireless LAN (WLAN) Specifications for Software R9.x.x

Security (Encryption)

• None/Open

• Shared

• WPA-Personal

• WPA2-Personal

• WPA-Enterprise

• WPA2-Enterprise

Encryption

• None

• WEP

• TKIP

• AES

Authentication

• None

• Microsoft PEAP using MSCHAP v2

• Username/password

• Limited support for server certificate verification using pre-installed trusted root CAS

• Client certificates not supported

• User authentication/confirmation prompts not supported

I-O DATA WN-G300U / Netgear WNA1000M

This wireless adapter supports the following network protocols:

Standards

• IEEE 802.11n, 802.11g, 802.11b

Supported Standards

NETGEAR WNA1000M

• FCC Part 15 Class B

I-O DATA WN-G300U

• Japan’s Radio Law

WPA-ENTERPRISE

NOTE: I-O DATA WN-G300U is only supported on Software R8.x.x.

3-46 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Peripherals Installation

Wireless Adapter AC1200 (For R9.x.x only)

This wireless adapter supports the following network protocols:

Standards

• IEEE 802.11n, 802.11g, 802.11a, 802.11b

Radio Data Rate

• 2.4GHz Up to 300 Mbps

• 5GHz up to 867 Mbps

Frequency

• 2.4000 - 2.4835GHz (subject to local regulations)

• 5.150 - 5.825GHz (subject to local regulations)

Supported Standards

• CE

• FCC

NetGear Wireless Adapter WNA3100

This wireless adapter supports the following network protocols:

Standards

• IEEE 802.11n, 802.11g, 802.11b

Radio Data Rate

Frequency

WPA-Enterprise

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

3-47

System Setup

Connecting to the WLAN

To connect the LOGIQ e to the WLAN,

1. Press Utility --> Connectivity --> TCP/IP --> Wireless

Network --> Configuration.

Figure 3-24. WLAN settings on TCPIP

The Wireless Network Configuration tool appears. Available

Wireless Networks appear.

2. Check “Enable Wireless Connection”.

3. Highlight the wireless network you want to use.

The Active Wireless LAN indicator appears on the display.

NOTE:

Figure 3-25. Active Wireless LAN Indicator

If the WLAN fails to connect, review and/or recreate the

Wireless connection on the Security Tab.

3-48 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Peripherals Installation

Adding a Wireless Network (For R8.x.x)

To add a WLAN profile (even for a network which is not yet available),

Network--> Security. The Wireless Network Configuration tool appears. Available Wireless Networks appear.

4. Add the following information to the Wireless Network

Properties page:

• Network Authentication (Open, Shared Key, WPA, WPA

PSK, WPA2, or WPA2 PSK).

5. After you have filled in all the required information, press

OK. To cancel adding this profile, press Cancel.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

3-49

System Setup

Adding a Wireless Network (For R9.x.x)

To add a WLAN profile (even for a network which is not yet available),

Network--> Configuration -> Security. The Wireless Network

Configuration tool appears. Available Wireless Networks appear.

4. Obtain and enter the correct information for each wireless network setting.

a. Enter a Network Name (SSID), then press OK.

A new window appears so you can enter the settings for this network.

b. On the connection page, check the appropriate box based on how you want the LOGIQ e to connect to this network.

3-50

Figure 3-26. WLAN Properties Connection Page

The LOGIQ e attempts to connect to available wireless networks based on the options you enable. If multiple networks are available, connection attempts begin with the network appearing topmost on the list.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Adding a Wireless Network (For R9.x.x) (continued)

Peripherals Installation

Figure 3-27. WLAN Properties Security Page d. Select the Security Type from the available options.

NOTE:

Figure 3-28. WLAN Security Types

Dialog boxes vary, depending on the Security Type selected.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

3-51

System Setup

Adding a Wireless Network (For R9.x.x) (continued)

e. Select the Encryption Type from the available options.

Figure 3-29. WLAN Encryption Types f. For Personal networks, enter the Network key.

g. For Enterprise network, choose the network authentication method and press Settings.

3-52

NOTE:

Figure 3-30. WLAN Network Authentication Method

Detailed settings for Enterprise networks are complex and must be correct for the connection to succeed.

Ensure you have all the required information/settings and work with your site’s IT Network Administrator as needed.

Creditials must be entered at this time. The LOGIQ e does not support automatic prompting for user credentials.

• For Microsoft PEAP networks, press Advanced and enter User authentication credentials (username and password).

• For Cisco networks, enter user credentials in the PEAP

Properties dialog after pressing the Settings button.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Peripherals Installation

Adding a Wireless Network (For R9.x.x) (continued)

NOTE: IMPORTANT: User credentials are not validated until you attempt to connect to the network.

h. When you have correctly entered all required settings, press OK in the Wireless Network Properties dialog.

Your settings will be validated and you may be prompted about certain settings which are not recommended or supported.

Examples: “Automatic connection to unencrypted networks is not recommended. Reminder to enter user credentials for Enterprise networks.” i. If changes are necessary, press Customize. Make corrections, then press OK. Settings will be validated again.

5. After you have filled in all the required information, press

OK. To cancel adding this profile, press Cancel.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

3-53

System Setup

Removing a WLAN

To remove a WLAN profile (even for a network which is not available),

Network--> Security. The Wireless Network Configuration tool appears. Available Wireless Networks appear.

Customizing Wireless Network Settings

To customize an existing WLAN profile,

Network--> Configuration. The Wireless Network

Configuration tool appears. Available Wireless Networks appear.

4. Add the following information: b. Network Authentication (Open, Shared Key, WPA PSK, or WPA2 PSK).

5. After you have filled in all the required information, press

OK. To cancel adding this profile, press Cancel.

3-54 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Peripherals Installation

Refreshing a WLAN

Refreshes the list of available Wireless Networks. To refresh the

Wireless Network,

Network--> Configuration. The Wireless Network

Configuration tool appears. Available Wireless Networks appear.

2. Highlight the wireless network you want to refresh.

3. Press Refresh from the bottom of the Configuration tool.

Setting a WLAN as Non-Preferable

When you make a WLAN non-preferable, you disconnect the network from the system and delete all connection settings from the system. Afterwards, the system WILL NOT try to reconnect to this WLAN automatically. And if you want to reconnect, you will need to re-add this WLAN.

Network--> Configuration. The Wireless Network

Configuration tool appears. Available Wireless Networks appear.

2. Highlight the wireless network you want to set as non-preferred.

3. Press Make Non-Preferable from the bottom of the

Configuration tool. You wil receive the following message to confirm this decision: “Are you sure you wish to make network _______ non-preferable? Network will be disconnected and system will not reconnect to this network automatically. Network connection settings will be deleted from the system.”

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

3-55

System Setup

Monitoring the WLAN

If there are wireless network communication problems, you can monitor the wireless network events.

To monitor Wireless Networking events,

Network--> Configuration. The Wireless Network

Configuration tool appears. Available Wireless Networks appear.

2. Select the Monitor Tab.

Figure 3-31. Monitor Tab

3-56 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Peripherals Installation

WLAN Diagnostics

Running diagnostics is good if you think the adapter might be bad. Diagnostics also tell you if the connection is behaving properly. Sometimes the scanner connects by accident to another internal device which uses the TCP/IP protocol. The diagnostics would show if there are errors when performing the full two-way communication. For example, if the IP address starts with 197 or 169 (loopback addresses), then something is wrong.

Network--> Configuration. The Wireless Network

Configuration tool appears. Available Wireless Networks appear.

2. Select the Diagnostics Tab.

Figure 3-32. WLAN Diagnostics Tab

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Figure 3-33. Diagnostic Results

3-57

System Setup

Repairing the WLAN

Occasionally you may need to repair a WLAN that has lost its connection to the LOGIQ e. To repair the Wireless Network,

Network--> Configuration. The Wireless Network

Configuration tool appears. Available Wireless Networks appear.

2. Select the Diagnostics Tab.

NOTE: DO NOT cancel the Repair operation after you have selected to repair the Wireless LAN connection.

If the WLAN is functioning properly, the following message appears. Confirm your decision to repair (Yes), or cancel (No).

Figure 3-34. Repair Message

3-58 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Peripherals Installation

Available WLAN Channels

The available WLAN channels show availability of wireless connect points that the scanner can talk to. Each channel supports a finite number of users and has limited signal strength. This may effect the ability to connect, the throughput and the connection dropping out.

To check the available WLAN channels,

Network--> Configuration. The Wireless Network

Configuration tool appears. Available Wireless Networks appear.

2. Select the Properties Tab.

Figure 3-35. Properties Tab

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Figure 3-36. Available Channels

3-59

System Setup

Disconnecting from the WLAN

To disconnect from the Wireless Network,

Network--> Configuration. The Wireless Network

Configuration tool appears.

2. Select the WLAN you are connected to.

Viewing WLAN Online Help

To view the WLAN Online Help, press Help.

3-60 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Peripherals Installation

Footswitch Installation

Tools

No special tools needed.

Manpower

One person 5 minutes.

Preparations

2. Ensure no physical damage.

Installation Procedure

1. Connect the Footswitch to the USB port on the LOGIQ e system.

Figure 3-37. Connect Footswitch to the system

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

3-61

System Setup

Footswitch Installation (continued)

Configuring Footswitch

Footswitch supports these configurations: No Function, Rec/

Pause, Freeze, Next Heartcycle, Prev Heartcycle, Print 1, Print

2, Print 3, Print 4, Update, Next Step (Scan Assistant), Previous

Step (Scan Assistant), Scan Assistant Pause/Resume or Mark

Cine. The default setting is No Function.

Enter Utility -> Application -> Settings to configure the

Footswitch functions.

3-62

Figure 3-38. Configuring Footswitch Functions

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Peripherals Installation

Barcode Scanner Installation

Tools

No special tools needed.

Manpower

One person 1 minute.

Preparations

1. Unpack the Barcode Scanner.

2. Ensure no physical damage.

Installation Procedure

1. Connect the Barcode Scanner to the USB port on the

LOGIQ e system.

Figure 3-39. Connect Barcode Scanner to the system

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

3-63

System Setup

Barcode Scanner Installation (continued)

NOTE: After the Barcode Scanner is connected to the Docking

Cart, the cable of the Barcode Scanner can be hung in the cable hook.

3-64

Figure 3-40. Barcode Scanner cable

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Peripherals Installation

Barcode Scanner Installation (continued)

Set Up Barcode Scanner

The barcode scanner needs to be set up before the first use.

To set up the barcode scanner, follow the steps below:

1. Power on the system. Connect barcode scanner to the system.

2. Scan the three barcodes.

First scan the Remove Custom Defaults barcode (1), then scan the Activate Defaults barcode (2). This is to reset the scanner to the factory default settings. Finally, scan the USB

Serial barcode (3). The Barcode scanner is ready for use.

NOTE:

Figure 3-41. Barcode

Only the printed barcodes on the paper can be scanned. If you do not have the printed version, be sure to print them to the paper first and scan them on the paper.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

3-65

System Setup

ECG Installation

Tools

• No special tools needed.

Manpower

• 1 person 1 minute.

Preparation

2. Ensure no physical damage.

Figure 3-42. ECG

Installation Procedure

1. Connect the ECG to the USB port on the system.

3-66

Figure 3-43. ECG Installation

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Peripherals Installation

Installation Procedure (continued)

2. Wait 5 seconds for ECG function start automatically.

Figure 3-44. ECG Mode

ECG Intended Use

ECG is intended to disclose either normal condition or patterns of arrhythmia, or features of prognostic value in the following cases:

• Patients with suspected cardiac abnormalities

• Populations of patients at an age or period in which a routine baseline evaluation of ECG characteristics is desired.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

3-67

System Setup

Patient Preparation

I

II

III

Lead

The ECG traces quality depends very much on the stability and conductivity of the electrodes during the test, especially during high stages when the patient movements can cause artifacts.

Here are some basic rules to ensure good electrical contact:

• Shave hair at the electrode contact points.

• Use a special shirt that attached the electrodes and lead wires to the body.

• Use high quality liquid gel electrodes.

• Make sure that the lead wires do not swing.

Detachable 3 leads each 100cm with clip connectors on the patient end designed for use with disposable ECG electrodes.

Furthermore, equip 3 repeatable limbs electrode clamps which can connect with clip connector. Limbs electrodes are white, red and green (AHA\IEC).

Table 3-19: ECG Lead Placement

RA (White)

LA (Black)

RL (Green)

Patient Cable Marking

AHA IEC

R (Red)

L (Yellow)

N (Black)

Position on Patient

Right Arm

Left Arm

Right Leg

Technical Specification of ECG

Table 3-20: ECG Technical Specifications

Feature

ECG

Patient Cable

Defibrillator Protection:

Patient leakage current

Ground Isolation

Input Impedance

CMMR

DC max.input

Frequency range (-3db)

Specification

3 leads conform to AAMI

Protected against 360 J discharge

< 10 uA

4 kV rms

>100 Mohm

> 100 dB

+/- 300mv

0.05 - 150 Hz

3-68 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Peripherals Installation

Table 3-20: ECG Technical Specifications (Continued)

Feature

Signal dynamic range

Power

Ext. ECG

Input Level

A2D

A2D resolution

Full scale range

LSB weight

Full scale +

Midscale

Midscale - LSB

Full scale -

Sample Rate

Communication

USB 2.0 compliant, Full Speed Device

Environmental

Operating Temperature Range

Storage Temperature Range:

Relative Humidity

Regulatory

Safety Standards

10mV

USB 5vdc, 80mA

12 bit,2’complement

+/- 5 mV

2.44 uV

+5 mV (Digital value = 7FF hex)

0mV (Digital value =000 hex)

-2.44 uV (Digital value = FFF hex)

-5 mV (Digital value = 800 hex)

1000

0°C to 50°C

-40°C to 70°C

0-85% non-condensing

Specification

+/- 1v, Amplification 1000

Control, Isochronous Transfer Types

IEC601-1 , IEC601-1-25

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

3-69

System Setup

3-70 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Chapter 4

General Procedures and

Functional Checks

This chapter provides procedures for quickly checking major functions of the LOGIQ e and diagnostics instructions using the built-in service software and power supply adjustments.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

4-1

General Procedures and Functional Checks

Overview

Contents in this chapter

• ‘Overview’ on page 4-2

• ‘General procedures’ on page 4-3

• ‘Functional checks’ on page 4-17

Special Equipment required

To perform these tests, you'll need any of the sector, linear, or convex transducers. (Normally you should check all the transducers used on the system).

4-2 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

General procedures

General procedures

Contents in this Section

• ‘Caution and Warning’ on page 4-4

• ‘Power ON/Boot Up’ on page 4-5

• ‘Connect AC/DC to the LOGIQ e’ on page 4-6

• ‘Switch ON the AC Power to LOGIQ e’ on page 4-8

• ‘Power shut down’ on page 4-11

• ‘Removable media’ on page 4-13

• ‘Archiving and loading presets’ on page 4-13

• ‘Where are the User Manuals and the Service Manual?’ on

page 4-15

• ‘How to display or print the PDF files from the Manual

CD-ROM?’ on page 4-15

• ‘Lockout/Tagout (LOTO) requirements’ on page 4-16

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

4-3

General Procedures and Functional Checks

Caution and Warning

CAUTION

WARNING

Ultrasound system requires all covers.

Operate this Ultrasound system only when all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. The covers are required for safe operation, good Ultrasound system performance and cooling purposes.

Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ e.

When servicing parts of the Ultrasound system where there is exposure to voltage greater than 30 volts:

1. Follow LOCK OUT/TAG OUT procedures.

2. Turn off the breaker.

3. Unplug the Ultrasound system.

4. Maintain control of the Ultrasound system power plug.

5. Wait for at least 30 seconds for capacitors to discharge as there are no test points to verify isolation.

Ultrasound System components may be energized.

4-4 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

General procedures

Power ON/Boot Up

Warnings

DANGER

DANGER

ALWAYS CONNECT THE ULTRASOUND SYSTEM TO A

FIXED POWER SOCKET WHICH HAS THE PROTECTIVE

GROUNDING CONNECTOR.

NEVER USE A THREE-TO-TWO PRONG ADAPTER; THIS

DEFEATS THE SAFETY GROUND.

DANGER

ENSURE THAT THE POWER CORD AND PLUG ARE

INTACT AND THAT THE POWER PLUG IS THE PROPER

HOSPITAL-GRADE TYPE (WHERE REQUIRED).

CAUTION

CAUTION

Ultrasound system requires all covers.

Operate this Ultrasound system only when all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. The covers are required for safe operation, good Ultrasound system performance and cooling purposes.

Use only power supply cords, cables and plugs provided by or designated by GE.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

4-5

General Procedures and Functional Checks

Connect AC/DC to the LOGIQ e

Connecting AC/DC to the LOGIQ e ultrasound unit, involves preliminary checks of the power cord, voltage level and compliance with electrical safety requirements.

1. Ensure that the wall outlet is of appropriate type.

2. Uncoil the power cable, allowing sufficient slack so that the unit can be moved slightly.

3. Verify that the power cable is without any visible scratches or any sign of damage.

4. Verify that the on-site mains voltage is within the limits indicated on the rating label near the Circuit Breaker on the rear of the unit.

5. Connect the Power Cable to the Power Inlet at the rear of the unit.

6. Connect the Power Cable’s other end (male plug) to a hospital grade mains power outlet with the proper rated voltage, and the unit is ready for Power ON/Boot Up.

4-6 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

General procedures

Connect AC/DC to the LOGIQ e (continued)

Lower the handle. Plug the AC adapter output connector into the system DC input port (located on the system’s rear panel) with the arrow side upward. Plug the AC adapter power cord into a grounded, protective earth outlet.

After AC/DC is connected correctly to the scanner, the power is applied to the scanner. When the Control panel Power On/Off key is pressed once, the System starts.

UP

Figure 4-1. Connect AC Adapter

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

4-7

General Procedures and Functional Checks

Switch ON the AC Power to LOGIQ e

When power is applied to the scanner, power is distributed to the Cooling Unit, Control Panel, LCD, Peripherals and the

Back-end Processor.

once.

Figure 4-2. Power On/Off button

When the Power On/Off switch on the Control Panel is pressed once, the Back-end Processor starts and the software code is distributed to initiate the scanner.

No status messages are displayed during this process.

4-8 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

General procedures

Check System Date and Time

A warning message “Please check the system date and time are

correct” appears on the screen when the system is powered up.

This warning message appears for the possible reasons:

• The system is not boot up for more than 14 days.

• The system time has been changed by 24 hours earlier than the current system time of last boot-up.

This warning message is to remind the user to check the system date in case the system date and time is incorrect.

Figure 4-3. Check system date and time message

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

4-9

General Procedures and Functional Checks

Check System Date and Time

(continued)

Move the cursor to OK and press the Cursor Key to select OK.

The system enters scanning mode.

Figure 4-4. Cursor key

Check the system date and time. If it is incorrect, follow below steps to reset the system date and time.

1. Enter Utility -> System -> General -> Date/Time.

2. Reset the system date and time.

4-10 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

General procedures

Power shut down

When you switch off the unit, the system performs an automatic shutdown sequence.

once.

2. The System-Exit window is displayed.

Figure 4-5. System Exit menu

3. Using the Trackball or Select key, select Shutdown.

4. The shutdown process takes 15 seconds and the power off sequence is complete when the power status LED is turned off.

5. Disconnect the probes. Clean or disinfect all probes as necessary. Store them in their shipping cases to avoid damage.

6. Close LCD cover.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

4-11

General Procedures and Functional Checks

Power shut down (continued)

NOTE:

The SYSTEM - EXIT menu, used when switching off the unit, gives you these choices:

•

Logoff

Use this button to log off the current user.

The system remains ON and ready for a new user to log on.

If the Logoff button is dimmed, it indicates that no user is logged on to the unit at the moment.

•

Shutdown

Use this button to shut down the system. The entire system will shut down. It is recommended to perform a full shutdown at least once a week.

•

Sleep Mode

Use this button when you do a portable exam in order to reduce the time to start up the system.

•

Cancel

Use this button to exit from the System-Exit menu and return to the previous operation.

•

Exit

(Only available when logged in as GE Service with Service

Dongle)

Select this button when you want to exit to the Windows

Desktop.

If you need to restart LOGIQ e when logged on to the

Windows Desktop, ensure that you do a complete power down (Shut Down). This is required to power up the Front

End Processor.

System shutdown

Disconnect the Mains Power Cable is necessary. For example:

Relocating the scanner.

CAUTION

DO NOT unplug and/or transport the unit until after the power off sequence has been completed. Failure to do so may result in corrupted patient files.

4-12 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

General procedures

Removable media

Refer to the latest revision of the User Manual to perform the following tasks:

• Formatting Removable Media

Archiving and loading presets

NOTE: Always save presets before any software reload. This ensures the presets loaded after the software reload are as up–to–date as possible.

NOTE: If you want to restore the wireless network configuration after software reload, DO NOT disconnect the wireless adapter during software reload process.

All user presets except changes to Summary, Anatomy, and

Biometry pages, can be saved on an DVD-R disk (or USB memory device, SD Card) for reloading on the system.

NOTE: Presets should NOT be saved on the same DVD-R disk (or USB memory device, SD Card) as images. The Archive Menu lists the images but does NOT list the presets stored on a DVD-R disk (or USB memory device, SD Card).

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

4-13

General Procedures and Functional Checks

Archiving Presets to an DVD-R Disk (or USB memory device, SD Card)

1. Insert an empty (blank) DVD-R disk into the DVD-RW.

2. Access to the Utility/Config Menu, and select System. The

Backup sheet will be shown on the LCD display.

Figure 4-6. Backup Sheet

3. Select the item to Backup/Restore.

4. Enter backup destination or browse through the disk to locate the destination.

5. Select Backup. The backup status for each item is displayed on the Result column.

Loading Presets from an DVD-R disk (or USB memory device, SD Card)

1. Insert the DVD-R disk with the archived Presets into the

DVD-RW.

2. Access to Utility->System->Backup/Restore. The Restore sheet will be shown on the LCD display. See Figure 4-6 on

page 4-14

.

3. Select the items needed to be restored.

4. Select Restore. The system performs the restore and restarts.

4-14 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

General procedures

Where are the User Manuals and the Service Manual?

Online versions of the User Manuals are available via the help function.

Both the User Manuals and the Service Manual are delivered as

PDF files on a CD-ROM. Paper copies may be ordered from

GE.

How to display or print the PDF files from the Manual CD-ROM?

1. Insert the CD-R disk (CD-ROM) into the CD-drive on a PC or Laptop with Adobe Acrobat Reader.

CAUTION

Do not try to use the LOGIQ e to read these files, it will not work!

2. Follow the instructions on the screen to display the manual of choice.

3. Before printing the complete manual, or pages from the manual, select File > Page Setup.

you may choose which pages to print and the number of copies you want to print (usually 1 copy).

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

4-15

General Procedures and Functional Checks

Lockout/Tagout (LOTO) requirements

Follow OSHA Lockout/Tagout requirements (USA) or local

Lockout/Tagout requirements by ensuring you are in total control of the AC power plug at all times during the service process.

To apply Lockout/Tagout:

1. Plan and prepare for shutdown.

2. Shutdown the equipment.

WARNING

6. Control all stored and residual energy.

All potentially hazardous stored or residual energy is relieved.

Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ e

When servicing parts of the system where there is exposure to voltage greater than 30 volts:

1. Turn off the scanner.

4. Wait for at least 20 seconds for capacitors to discharge as there are no test points to verify isolation. The amber light on the operator panel On/Off button will turn off.

5. Remove the system battery.

All potentially hazardous stored or residual energy is relieved.

4-16 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Functional checks

Functional checks

Contents in this Section

• ‘Overview’ on page 4-18

• ‘Operator Panel’ on page 4-18

• ‘Soft Menu Key Tour’ on page 4-19

• ‘Monitor Display’ on page 4-20

• ‘Performance Tests’ on page 4-21

• ‘B mode Checks’ on page 4-21

• ‘M Mode Checks’ on page 4-25

• ‘Color Flow Mode Checks’ on page 4-28

• ‘Doppler Mode Checks’ on page 4-32

• ‘Tissue Velocity Imaging (TVI) Checks’ on page 4-37

• ‘CWD Functional Check’ on page 4-39

• ‘Basic Measurements’ on page 4-41

• ‘Probe/Connectors Check’ on page 4-42

• ‘Cineloop Check’ on page 4-44

• ‘Image Management’ on page 4-45

• ‘Backup and Restore Database, Preset Configurations and

Images’ on page 4-46

• ‘Restore System Presets and Configurations’ on page 4-48

• ‘Software Configuration Checks’ on page 4-52

• ‘Peripheral Checks’ on page 4-52

• ‘Color Printers’ on page 4-52

• ‘DVD-RW Settings and Check-out’ on page 4-57

• ‘Wireless LAN Adapter Checks’ on page 4-58

• ‘Footswitch Checks’ on page 4-60

• ‘USB memory stick checks’ on page 4-60

• ‘Barcode Scanner Checks’ on page 4-60

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

4-17

General Procedures and Functional Checks

Overview

In this section, the functional checks for are described.

Functional checks are used to verify that the product works as intended. Functional checks may also be used during troubleshooting.

Operator Panel

Figure 4-7. Control Panel Tour

1. Time Gain Compensation (TGC)

3. Mode/Gain/Auto keys: M-Mode, Doppler (PW)

Modes, Color Flow (CF) Mode and B-Mode

5. Steer

6. Coded Harmonic Imaging (CHI)

7. Report

8. Additional Feature Keys: Exam, Needle, PDI

9. Imaging/Measurement Keys: Cursor, Clear,

Body Pattern, Measure, M/D Cursor, Scan

Area, Enter

10. Depth/Zoom/Ellipse

11. Start/Stop (L/R)

12. Freeze

13. Programmable Image Store Keys

14. Utility

15. Keyboard

4-18 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Functional checks

Soft Menu Key Tour

In general, there are two types of softMenu keys: Paddle Switch and adjustable knobs.

Figure 4-8. SoftMenu Key Tour

1. Press the adjustable knobs to toggle option menu between line one and line two.

2. Rotate the adjustable knobs to adjust the corresponding parameters.

3. The Paddle Switch is used to access and adjust the Sub

SoftMenu.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

4-19

General Procedures and Functional Checks

Monitor Display

Figure 4-9. Monitor Display Tour

2. Center Mark for all linear and convex probes

(used for short axis needle guidance)

3. Patient Name, Patient Identification

4. Institution/Hospital Name, Date, Time, Operator

Identification, system status (real-time of frozen)

5. GE Symbol: Probe Orientation Marker

7. Image.

10. Measurement Results Window

11. Probe Identifier. Exam Preset

12. Imaging Parameters by Mode.

13. Focal Zone Indicator

14. Depth Scale

15. Body Pattern.

16. Touch Panel.

17. Trackball Functionality Status: Scroll, M&A

(Measurement and Analysis), Position, Size,

Scan Area Width and Tilt

18. Plug icon

19. Start Menu Icon

20. Caps Lock On

21. Time

4-20 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Performance Tests

B mode Checks

Introduction

The B Mode is the system’s default mode.

B Mode Screen Example

Functional checks

Preparations

Figure 4-10. B Mode Screen Image Example

1. Connect one of the probes.

For available probes, See ‘Available probes’ on page 3-30

for more information.

.

See ‘Connect a probe’ on page 3-18 for more information. for info about connecting the probes.

2. Turn ON the scanner (if it isn’t turned on already).

The B Mode window is displayed (default mode).

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

4-21

General Procedures and Functional Checks

B mode Checks (continued)

Adjust the B mode controls

1

2

Step

3

4

Figure 4-11. Controls available in B Mode

1. Press B on the Operator Panel to access B mode.

2. These Image Controls are used to optimize the B picture.

Verify that all the listed controls are working as intended:

Table 4-1: B Mode Operator Panel Controls

Task

Press B Mode key

Adjust Depth

Adjust Gain

Adjust Focus

Expected Result(s)

B Mode Starts

Adjust the field of view. Increasing the depth may view larger/deeper structures rates, and decreasing the depth may view near the skin line.Press Up/Down Button to increase/ decrease. Depth displays on the monitor in cm.

Controls the amount of echo information displayed in an image. Turn B Mode dial to the left/right to increase/decrease Gain. Gain displays on the monitor in Gn (dB).

Increases the number of focal zones or moves the focal zone(s) to tighten up the beam for specific area. Press the control to toggle between Focus Position and Focus Number.

Press Up/Down Button to move or adjust the focal numbers.

Comments

4-22 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

5

Step

7

8

9

10

Functional checks

Adjust Time Gain

Compensation

(TGC)

Reverse

Table 4-1: B Mode Operator Panel Controls

Task

Activate Auto

Optimize

Adjust Scan Area

Adjust Zoom

Expected Result(s)

Optimize the image based upon a specified region of interest or anatomy. Press the Center

Button in the Gain Dial to toggle the ATO/ACE

On and Off.

Amplifies the returning signals to correct for the attenuation caused by tissues at increasing depth. TGC slide pots spaced proportional to the depth. Move the slide pots to the left/right to decrease/increase TGC. A TGC curve appears on the display.

Widen or narrow the size of the sector angle to maximize the image’s region of interest (ROI).

Press Scan Area and move the Trackball to narrow/widen the angle.

Changes the location of the focal point(s). A triangular focus marker indicates the depth of the focal point.

Toggles the left/right orientation of the scan image.

Comments

B Mode Softmenu Key

1

2

3

4

5

Step Task

Adjust Rejection

Adjust Edge

Enhance

Table 4-2: B Mode Softmenu Key

Activate Colorize

Activate Gray Map

Adjust Frequency

Expected Result(s)

Selects a level below which echoes will not be amplified (an echo must have a certain minimum amplitude before it will be processed).

Enables gray scale image colorization. To deactivate, reselect a Gray Map.

Edge Enhance brings out subtle tissue differences and boundaries by enhancing the gray scale differences corresponding to the edges of structures. Adjustments to M Mode's edge enhancement affects the M Mode only.

Determines how the echo intensity levels received are presented as shades of gray.

Multi Frequency mode lets you downshift to the probe's next lower frequency or shift up to a higher frequency.

Comments

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

4-23

General Procedures and Functional Checks

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

Step Task

Adjust Frame

Average

Adjust Rotation

Adjust Line Density

Adjust Frame Rate

Power output

Dynamic Range

Virtual Convex

Virtual Apex

Table 4-2: B Mode Softmenu Key

Focus Number and

Position

Expected Result(s)

Temporal filter that averages frames together.

This has the effect of presenting a smoother, softer image.

Rotates the image by selecting the value from the pop-up menu.

Optimizes B Mode frame rate or spatial resolution for the best possible image.

Optimizes B Mode frame rate or spatial resolution for the best possible image.

Optimizes image quality and allows user to reduce beam intensity. 2% increments between 0-100%. Values greater than 0.1 are displayed.

Dynamic Range controls how echo intensities are converted to shades of gray, thereby increasing the adjustable range of contrast.

Increases the number of transmit focal zones or moves the focal zone(s) so that you can tighten up the beam for a specific area. A graphic caret corresponding to the focal zone position(s) appears on the right edge of the image.

Virtual Convex for linear probe

Virtual Convex for Sector probe

Comments

4-24 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Functional checks

M Mode Checks

Introduction

M Mode provides a display format that represents tissue motion occurring over time along a single vector.

M-Mode Screen Example

Preparations

Figure 4-12. M Mode Screen Image Example

1. Connect one of the probes.

For available probes, See ‘Available probes’ on page 3-30

for more information.

.

See ‘Connect a probe’ on page 3-18 for more information. for info about connecting the probes.

2. Turn ON the scanner (if it isn’t turned on already).

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

4-25

General Procedures and Functional Checks

M Mode Checks (continued)

Adjust the M Mode controls

1

2

Step

3

Figure 4-13. Controls available in M Mode

1. Press M on the Operator Panel to access M mode.

2. These Image Controls are used to optimize the M picture.

Verify that all the listed controls are working as intended:

Table 4-3: M Mode Operator Panel Controls

Task

Press M Mode key

Adjust Gain

Display M-Mode

Cursor

Expected Result(s)

M Mode Starts

Controls the amount of echo information displayed in an image. Turn B Mode dial to the left/right to increase/decrease Gain. Gain displays on the monitor in Gn (dB).

Displays the M-Mode cursor on the B-Mode image. Press Cursor and Trackball to position

M-Mode Cursor.

Comments

4-26 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Functional checks

M Mode Checks (continued)

M Mode Softmenu Key

1

2

3

4

6

7

8

9

10

Step

Table 4-4: M Mode Softmenu key

Task Expected Result(s)

Adjust Rejection Selects a level below which echoes will not be amplified (an echo must have a certain minimum amplitude before it will be processed).

Adjust Sweep Speed Changes the speed at which the time line is swept. The following speed values are available, 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16.

Adjust Edge

Enhance

Edge Enhance brings out subtle tissue differences and boundaries by enhancing the gray scale differences corresponding to the edges of structures. Adjustments to M Mode's edge enhancement affects the M Mode only.

Activate Gray Map

Activate Colorize

Determines how the echo intensity levels received are presented as shades of gray.

Enables gray scale image colorization. To deactivate, reselect a Gray Map.

Activate Full

Timeline

Select Display

Format

Adjust Dynamic

Range

(Compression)

Power output

Displays only timeline screen. Press the Full

Timescreen to activate.

Select the format to display B image and M image on the LCD. Press Display Format, and select from the pop up menu.

Dynamic Range controls how echo intensities are converted to shades of gray, thereby increasing the adjustable range of contrast.

Optimizes image quality and allows user to reduce beam intensity. 2% increments between 0-100%. Values greater than 0.1 are displayed.

Comments

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

4-27

General Procedures and Functional Checks

Color Flow Mode Checks

Introduction

Color Flow screens are B Mode or M Mode screens with colors representing blood or tissue movement.

Color Flow Mode Screen Example

Preparations

Figure 4-14. CFM Mode Screen Image Example

1. Connect one of the probes.

For available probes, See ‘Available probes’ on page 3-30

for more information.

.

See ‘Connect a probe’ on page 3-18 for more information. for info about connecting the probes.

2. Turn ON the scanner (if it isn’t turned on already).

4-28 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Color Flow Mode Checks (continued)

Adjust the Color Mode controls

Functional checks

1

Step

2

Figure 4-15. Controls available in Color Flow Mode

1. Press Color on the Operator Panel to access Color mode.

2. These Image Controls are used to optimize the Color picture. Verify that all the listed controls are working as intended:

Table 4-5: Color Flow Mode Operator Panel Controls

Task

Press Color Mode key

Adjust Gain

Expected Result(s)

Color Flow Mode Starts

Comments

Amplifies the overall strength of the echoes processed in the Color Flow window. Turn the

Gain dial (CFM Mode key) to the left/right to increase/decrease Gain.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

4-29

General Procedures and Functional Checks

Color Flow Mode Softmenu Key

Table 4-6: Color Flow Mode Softmenu Key

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Step Task Expected Result(s)

Threshold

Packet Size

Select maps

Adjust Frequency

Set Frame Average

Invert

Threshold assigns the gray scale level at which color information stops.

Controls the number of samples gathered for a single color flow vector.

Allows a specific color map to be selected.

After a selection has been made, the color bar displays the resultant map.

Enables the adjustment of the probe’s operating frequency. Press Frequency and select desired value. The selected frequency is displayed in the status window.

Averages color frames. Press Frame Average up/down to smooth temporal averaging.

Views blood flow from a different perspective.

Press Invert to reverse the color map.

Adjust LIne Density

Adjust Frame Rate

Move Baseline

Trades frame rate for sensitivity and spatial resolution. If the frame rate is too slow, reduce the size of the region of interest, select a different line density setting, or reduce the packet size.

Adjust Frame rate to a higher setting to improve motion detection, or to a lower setting to improve resolution.

Activate Spatial Filter Adjust Spatial Filter to smooth out the color, makes it look less pixely.

Adjust Dynamic

Range

Dynamic Range controls how echo intensities are converted to shades of gray, thereby increasing the adjustable range of contrast.

TIC Analysis/

QAnalysis

Time Intensity Curve (TIC) Analysis/

QAanalysis watch the agent flow through the anatomy of interest and calculates the mean pixel intensity within that ROI for all frames in the user designated loop and plots the resulting data as a function of time. Select a desired cine loop from the stored images.

Adjust Angle Steer Slants the Color Flow region of interest or the

Doppler line to obtain a better Doppler angle.

Adjusts the baseline to accommodate faster or slower blood flows to eliminate aliasing.

Comments

4-30 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

20

21

13

Step

14

15

16

17

18

19

Functional checks

Task

Change scale (PRF)

Transparency Map

Focus Position

Power output

Wall Filter

Table 4-6: Color Flow Mode Softmenu Key

Map Compress

Accumulation

Sample Vol

Flash Suppression

Expected Result(s)

Velocity scale determines pulse repetition frequency. If the sample volume gate range exceeds single gate PRF capability, the system automatically switches to high PRF mode. Multiple gates appear, and HPRF is indicated on the display.

Allows to select specific transparency map

Increases the number of transmit focal zones or moves the focal zone(s) so that you can tighten up the beam for a specific area. A graphic caret corresponding to the focal zone position(s) appears on the right edge of the image.

Optimizes image quality and allows user to reduce beam intensity. 10% increments between 0-100%. Values greater than 0.1 are displayed.

Wall Filter insulates the Doppler signal from excessive noise caused from vessel movement.

When you increase the value, high velocity elements in the map are compressed so that the map darkens. When you decrease the value, low velocity elements in the map are compressed so that the map lightens.

Accumulation enhances the flow in an image.

Off-Infinite: Infinite provides the same result as applying CINE Capture to a B-Flow CINE clip.

Adjust the control to adjust the sample volume gate on the Color Flow image.

Activates/deactivates Flash Suppression, a motion artifact elimination process.

Comments

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

4-31

General Procedures and Functional Checks

Doppler Mode Checks

Introduction

PW Doppler are used to measure velocity (most often in blood).

Doppler mode can be done with a special pencil probe or with an ordinary probe. By using an ordinary probe, you can first bring up a B Mode picture for navigation purpose and then add

PW Doppler.

Doppler Mode Screen Example

Preparations

Figure 4-16. Doppler Mode Screen Image Example

1. Connect one of the probes.

For available probes, See ‘Available probes’ on page 3-30

for more information.

.

See ‘Connect a probe’ on page 3-18 for more information. for info about connecting the probes.

2. Turn ON the scanner (if it isn’t turned on already).

4-32 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Doppler Mode Checks (continued)

Adjust the PW Doppler Mode controls

Functional checks

Figure 4-17. Controls available in Doppler Mode

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

4-33

General Procedures and Functional Checks

Adjust the PW Doppler Mode controls (continued)

1. Press Color on the Operator Panel to access Color mode.

1

2

3

4

Step

Use the trackball to select the Area of Interest (Sample

Volume) in PW or direction of interest in CW.

3. These Image Controls are used to optimize the Color picture. Verify that all the listed controls are working as intended:

Table 4-7: PW Doppler Mode Operator Panel Controls

Task

Press PW Mode key

Adjust Gain

Display M/D-Mode

Cursor

B-Pause/Enter

Expected Result(s)

PW Mode Starts

Amplifies the overall strength of the echoes processed in the Color Flow window. Turn the

Gain dial (PW Mode key) to the left/right to increase/decrease Gain.

Displays the M/D-Mode cursor on the B-Mode image. Press Cursor and Trackball to position sample volume graphic. Click SV gate to adjust sample volume gate size.

Toggle between simultaneous and update presentation while viewing Spectral Doppler.

Press B Pause to toggle between simultaneous and update.

Comments

Doppler Mode Soft Menu Key

Table 4-8: PW Doppler Mode Soft Menu Key

1

2

3

4

5

Step Task

Adjust Rejection

Expected Result(s)

Selects a level below which echoes will not be amplified (an echo must have a certain minimum amplitude before it will be processed).

Adjust Sweep Speed Changes the speed at which timeline is swept.

Press Sweep Speed up/down to increase/ decrease the value.

Activate Full

Timeline

Displays only timeline screen. Press the Full

Timescreen to activate.

Select Display

Format

Adjust Frequency

Display layout can be preset to have B-Mode and Time-motion side-by-side or over-under.

Enables the adjustment of the probe’s operating frequency. Press Frequency and select desired value. The selected frequency is displayed in the status window.

Comments

4-34 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

16

17

8

9

10

11

6

7

Step

12

13

14

15

Functional checks

Table 4-8: PW Doppler Mode Soft Menu Key

Task

Trace Direction

Invert

Auto Calcs

Modify Auto Calcs

Trace Method

Activate Colorize

Activate Gray Map

Compression

(Dynamic Range)

Adjust Angle Correct

Adjust Steer/Fine

Steer

Move Baseline

Change PRF (Pulse

Repetition

Frequencies) - (Wall

Filter)

Change Scale - (Low

Vel Reject)

Expected Result(s)

Allows to select different trace direction.

Vertically inverts the spectral trace without affecting the baseline position. Press invert to invert the spectral trace. The Plus and Minus signs on the velocity scale reverse when the spectrum is inverted.

Enables or disables auto calculation.

Activates the window to modify the auto calculation items.

Allows to select different trace method.

Colorize the gray scale image to enhance the eyes’ discrimination capability. Press the

Cololize, Trackball to cycle through available maps and press Set to select.

Displays a map window adjacent to the image.

Move the trackball to select the map. The image reflects the map as scrolled through the selections. Press Set to select.

Controls how echo intensities are converted to shades of gray. Click Dynamic Range to increase/decrease the value.

Estimates the flow velocity in a direction at an angle to the Doppler vector by computing the angle between the Doppler vector and the flow to be measured.

Slant the Color Flow linear image left or right to get more information without moving probes.

Click Angle Steer to the left to slant the linear image.

Adjusts the baseline to accommodate faster or slower blood flows to eliminate aliasing.

Velocity scale determines pulse repetition frequency. If the sample volume gate range exceeds single gate PRF capability, the system automatically switches to high PRF mode. Multiple gates appear, and HPRF is indicated on the display.

Velocity scale determines pulse repetition frequency. If the sample volume gate range exceeds single gate PRF capability, the system automatically switches to high PRF mode. Multiple gates appear, and HPRF is indicated on the display.

Comments

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

4-35

General Procedures and Functional Checks

18

Step

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

Table 4-8: PW Doppler Mode Soft Menu Key

Task

Trace Sensitivity

PW/CF Ratio

Spectral Avg

Power output

SV Length

Wall Filter

Cycles to Average

Quick Angle

Expected Result(s)

Adjusts the sensitivity to get more accurate envelope trace.

Adjust PW/CF Ratio to show Maximum Ratio and Minimum Ratio of Color (Power) Doppler

Pixels in each ROI.

Optimizes the smoothness of the spectrum.

Different levels can be selected.

Optimizes image quality and allows user to reduce beam intensity. 10% increments between 0-100%.

Sizes the sample volume gate.

Wall Filter insulates the Doppler signal from excessive noise caused from vessel movement.

Set the average value over a number of cycles

(from 1-5).

Quickly adjusts the angle by 60 degrees. Press

Quick Angle to toggle between Off, Right and

Left.

Comments

4-36 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Functional checks

Tissue Velocity Imaging (TVI) Checks

Introduction

TVI calculates and color codes the velocities in tissue. The tissue velocity information is acquired by sampling of tissue

Doppler velocity values at discrete points. The information is stored in a combined format with grey scale imaging during one or several cardiac cycles with high temporal resolution.

Preparation

1. Connect one of the probes.

For available probes, See ‘Available probes’ on page 3-30

for more information.

.

See ‘Connect a probe’ on page 3-18 for more information. about connecting the probes.

2. Turn ON the scanner (if it isn’t turned on already).

TVI Mode Screen Example

Figure 4-18. TVI Mode Screen Image Example

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

4-37

General Procedures and Functional Checks

Tissue Velocity Imaging (TVI) Checks (continued)

Adjust the TVI Controls

1. Set PDI button for TVI mode in Utility -> Imaging -> General.

2. Press the PDI key to activate TVI Mode.

Adjust TVI Mode Softmenu Key

Table 4-9: TVI Mode Softmenu Key

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Step Task Expected Result(s)

Adjust Visible

Adjust LIne Density

Select Visible to display TVI Color with TVI.

Trades frame rate for sensitivity and spatial resolution. If the frame rate is too slow, reduce the size of the region of interest, select a different line density setting, or reduce the packet size.

Select Color Map Allows a specific color map to be selected.

After a selection has been made, the color bar displays the resultant map.

Threshold Threshold assigns the gray scale level at which color information stops.

Activate Spatial Filter Adjust Spatial Filter to smooth out the color, makes it look less pixely.

TVI Gain Control color transparency. High values display more color; low values display more tissue.

Width Adjust the sizes of ROI.

Comments

4-38 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Functional checks

CWD Functional Check

Introduction

CW Doppler are used to measure velocity (most often in blood).

Doppler mode can be done with a special pencil probe or with an ordinary probe. By using an ordinary probe, you can first bring up a B Mode picture for navigation purpose and then add

CW Doppler.

CWD Mode Screen Example

Preparation

Figure 4-19. CWD Mode Image Example

1. Connect 3Sc-RS/6S-RS Probe to the system.

See ‘Connect a probe’ on page 3-18 for more information. for info about connecting the probes.

2. Turn ON the scanner (if it isn’t turned on already).

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

4-39

General Procedures and Functional Checks

CWD Functional Check (continued)

Activating CW Doppler

To activate CW Doppler Mode:

1. Ensure that the appropriate CW probe is connected.

2. Set the hot key (From programmable key F5-F12) for CWD.

3. Press the hot key which is assigned for CWD mode. The

Doppler Spectrum appears, along with the CW Touch Panel

Menu.

The following CW parameters are displayed: Frequency, Gain,

Acoustic Output, Scale, Wall Filter and Dynamic Range.

Exiting CW Doppler

To exit CW Doppler Mode:

Press the hot key which is assigned for CWD Mode.

4-40 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Functional checks

Basic Measurements

and then press Freeze.

Distance and Tissue Depth Measurements

2. To position the active caliper at the start point (distance) or the most anterior point (tissue depth), move the Trackball.

3. To fix the start point, press Enter. The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper.

4. To position the second active caliper at the end point

(distance) or the most posterior point (tissue depth), move the Trackball.

5. To complete the measurement, press Enter. The system displays the distance or tissue depth value in the measurement results window.

Circumference/Area (Ellipse) Measurement

2. To position the active caliper, move the Trackball.

3. To fix the start point, press Enter. The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper.

4. To position the second caliper, move the Trackball.

appears

6. To position the ellipse and to size the measured axes (move the calipers), move the Trackball.

7. To increase the size, rotate the Ellipse button clockwise. To decrease the size, contrarotate the Ellipse button

8. To complete the measurement, press Enter. The system displays the circumference and area in the measurement results window.

Worksheets

Measurement/Calculation worksheets are available to display and edit measurements and calculations. There are generic worksheets as well as Application specific worksheets. The worksheets are selected from the Measurement Touch Panel.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

4-41

General Procedures and Functional Checks

Probe/Connectors Check

NOTE: Probes can be connected at any time, whether the unit is ON or

OFF

Connecting a Probe

1. Place the probe's carrying case on a stable surface and open the case.

2. Carefully remove the probe and unwrap the probe cable.

3. DO NOT allow the probe head to hang free. Impact to the probe head could result in irreparable damage.

4. Align the connector with the probe port and carefully push into place.

5. Lock the probe latch upward.

6. Carefully position the probe cord so it is free to move and is not resting on the floor.

Activating the probe

Deactivating the probe

The probe activates in the currently-selected operating mode.

The probe's default settings for the mode and selected exam are used automatically.

2. Gently wipe the excess gel from the face of the probe.

(Refer to the Basic User Manual for complete probe cleaning instructions).

3. Carefully slide the probe around the right side of the keyboard, toward the probe holder. Ensure that the probe is placed gently in the probe holder.

4-42 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Functional checks

Probe/Connectors Check (continued)

Disconnecting the probe

Probes can be disconnected at any time. However, the probe should not be selected as the active probe.

1. Unlock the probe latch downward.

2. Pull the probe and connector straight out of the probe port.

3. Carefully slide the probe and connector away from the probe port and around the right side of the keyboard.

4. Ensure the cable is free.

5. Be sure that the probe head is clean before placing the probe in its storage box.

WARNING

Take the following precautions with the probe cables: Do not bend. If you have purchased the cart option, be sure to keep probe cables free from the wheels.

WARNING

Be careful not to trip on the probe cables if using the device without the optional cart.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

4-43

General Procedures and Functional Checks

Cineloop Check

Introduction

A cineloop is a sequence of images recorded over a certain time frame. When using ECG the time frame can be adjusted to cover one or more heart cycles. When frozen, the System automatically displays the cineloop boundary markers on either side of the last detected heart cycle.

Activating CINE

Press Freeze, then roll the Trackball to activate CINE. To start

CINE Loop playback, press Run/Stop. To stop CINE Loop playback. press Run/Stop.

Adjust the Cineloop controls

Quickly Move to Start/End Frame

Press First to move to the first CINE frame; press Last to move to the last CINE frame.

Start Frame/End Frame

Press the Start Frame Two-Button Softkey to move to the beginning of the CINE Loop. Adjust the Start Frame up/down

Two-Button Softkey upward to move forward through the CINE

Loop. Adjust the Softkey downward to move backward through the CINE Loop.

Press the End Frame Two-Button Softkey to move to the end of the CINE Loop. Adjust the End Frame up/down Two-Button

Softkey upward to move forward through the CINE Loop. Adjust the Softkey downward to move backward through the CINE

Loop.

Adjusting the CINE Loop Playback Speed

Adjust the Loop Speed up/down Two-Button Softkey to increase/decrease the CINE Loop playback speed.

Moving through a CINE Loop Frame By Frame

Adjust the Frame by Frame up/down Two-Button Softkey to move through CINE memory one frame at a time.

4-44 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Functional checks

Image Management

For Image Management functionality refer to the LOGIQ e User

Manual. It talks about several topics:

• Clipboard

• Browsing and Managing an Exam’s Stored Image

• Connectivity, and Dataflow Concept and Creation

• TCP/IP

• Buttons

• Views

• Verifying and Pinging a Device

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

4-45

General Procedures and Functional Checks

Backup and Restore Database, Preset Configurations and Images

Formatting Media

To Format the backup media, DVD:

1. Go to Utility -> Connectivity -> Removable Media.

2. Select the media type from the drop down menu.

3. Enter the label for the media. It is best to use all capital letters with no spaces or punctuation marks. Press Format.

4-46

Figure 4-20. Format and verify media

4. A pop-up message displays to inform operation completed.

Press OK.

5. If desired, verify that the format was successful by selecting

Verify in Utility -> Connectivity -> Removable Media. see

Figure 4-20 on page 4-46 .

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Functional checks

Backup System Presets and Configurations

NOTE: Always backup any preset configurations before a software reload. This ensures that if the presets need to be reloaded, after the software update, they will be the same ones the customer was using prior to service.

NOTE:

1. Insert a formatted DVD-R disk into the drive.

2. Go to Utility -> System -> Backup/Restore

If you are not logged in as GE Service or with administrator privileges, the Operator Login window is displayed. Log on with administrator privileges.

3. In the Backup list, select Patient Archive, Report Archive and User Defined Configuration and Service.

4. In the Media field, select DVD(or USB memory device, SD

Card).

The system performs the backup. As it proceeds, status information is displayed on the Backup/Restore screen.

Figure 4-21. Backup/Restore Menu

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

4-47

General Procedures and Functional Checks

Restore System Presets and Configurations

CAUTION

NOTE:

The restore procedure overwrites the existing database on the local hard disk drive. Make sure to insert the correct DVD (or

USB memory device, SD Card).

1. Insert the Backup/Restore DVD-R disk (or USB memory device, SD Card) into the drive.

2. Go to Utility -> System -> Backup/Restore

If you are not logged in with administrator privileges, the

Operator Login window is displayed. Log on with administrator privileges.

3. In the Restore list, select Patient Archive, Report Archive,

User Defined Configuration and Service.

4. In the Media field, select the Backup/Restore DVD-RW (or

USB memory device, SD Card).

The system performs the restore. As it proceeds, status information is displayed on the Backup/Restore screen.

After the Restore completes, the system need to reboot.

4-48

Figure 4-22. Backup/Restore Menu

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Functional checks

Archiving Images

NOTE:

1. Insert the archive media. To format the archive media,

DVD-R disk, select the Utility button on the Keyboard.

2. Go to Utility -> Connectivity -> Removable.

3. Format the DVD-R disk. Verify the format if desired.

4. Images will be moved from the hard disk drive by date.

Therefore, the best way is to label media by date.

Images will be moved from the hard disk drive by date.

Therefore, the best way to label media is by date. When images are moved to the archive media, they will be deleted from the system hard disk drive. However, the patient database (backed up earlier) maintains pointers to the location of the images on the archive media.

Figure 4-23. Format DVD-RW Screen

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

4-49

General Procedures and Functional Checks

Archiving Images (continued)

and EZBackup requirements.

Figure 4-24. EZBackup/Move

6. Press Patient on the control pane to enter Patient Screen.

7. Set the Dataflow to Store images directly to DVD-R disk.

displays. Then Press Next

4-50

Figure 4-25. Image Archive window

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Functional checks

Archiving Images (continued)

9. A Storage Size Information window appears. Press Next to continue.

10. An EZBackup in Progress... window displays. When the

EZBackup is complete, press Next to continue.

11. Press Finish.

Figure 4-26. EZBackup/Move complete

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

4-51

General Procedures and Functional Checks

Software Configuration Checks

3.

4.

1.

2.

5.

Step

Table 4-10: Software Configuration Checks

Task to do

Check Date and Time setting

Check that Location (Hospital

Name) is correct

Check Language settings

Check assignment of Printer Keys

Check that all of the customer’s options are set up correct

Expected Result(s)

Date and Time are correct

Location Name is correct

Desired Language is displayed

For LOGIQ e, the default function for Print1-3

Keys is P1 (store image); P2 (print); P3 (USB

Quick Save). Print1-3 Keys can also be assigned as desired by the customer

All authorized functions are enabled

Peripheral Checks

This section describes the final setup for the Peripherals and the

Operational Check-out. For Peripherals installation information,

See ‘Peripherals Installation’ on page 3-34 for more information.

Check that peripherals work as described below:

Color Printers

The Printers are controlled from the P2 on the system’s control panel. The factory setting is P2 for the standard print.

Take Sony UP-D25MD Color Printer for an example to show the control assignment procedure.

4-52 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Functional checks

Control assignment procedure

The Control Assignment for the printers is done in the Utility

Menu.

1. Turn on the Peripherals and power on the system.

2. Select Utility -> Peripherals.

and Default Printer. Select Save.

NOTE:

Figure 4-27. Select Printer

For control assignment on the network printer HP Universal

Printing PCL6,the control can only work when the network of the system is connected.

Figure 4-28. Network Printer

Select Properties to view the document information and configure properties for standard printer.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

4-53

General Procedures and Functional Checks

Figure 4-29. Standard Printer Properties

• Printer: A printer to be used as Standard Print.

• Rows: Specify rows on print.

• Bottom Margin: Specify bottom margin on print.

4-54 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Functional checks

Color Printers (continued)

4. Select Utility -> Connectivity -> Service.

UP-D25MD. Select Save to save the setting.

Figure 4-30. Standard Print

Physical Print Buttons, select Print2.

View.

Figure 4-31. Add Standard Print

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

4-55

General Procedures and Functional Checks

Color Printers

(continued)

8. If another device has been selected, use “<<“to clear window.

Color Printers Checks

Make sure Printer Function is assigned to P2 key.

Table 4-11: Printer checks

1

2

Step Task

When scanning in B Mode, press

Freeze to stop image acquisition

Press P2 key on the control panel.

Expected Result(s)

Image scanning stops with the last image on the screen.

The image displayed on the screen is printed on Color printer, depending on the key assignment configuration.

3 Check if the print quality is of expected quality.

NOTE: For checking the printer function on HP Universal Printing PCL6

Network Printer, when pressing P2, a pop-up window displays to require you to input the Printer Address. Contact your network administrator for local network information.

4-56 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

DVD-RW Settings and Check-out

1. Connect DVD-RW to the system.

2. Insert the DVD/CD into the DVD-RW.

Functional checks

Figure 4-32. Removable Media

4. Click Verify to check the media’s status.

Figure 4-33. Verify Media

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

4-57

General Procedures and Functional Checks

Wireless LAN Adapter Checks

1. Connect Wireless LAN Adapter to the USB port on the system. The Wireless Network configuration displays.

4-58

Figure 4-34. Wireless configuration running Wireless Network Configuration. Wait until Wireless

Network Configuration window appears.

Figure 4-35. Message

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Functional checks

Wireless LAN Adapter Checks (continued)

3. Select the Wireless Networks and select Connect.

Figure 4-36. Wireless Network Configuration

4. The wireless network icon at the left bottom of the screen shows the wireless network is connected.

Figure 4-37. Wireless Network connected

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

4-59

General Procedures and Functional Checks

Footswitch Checks

Step

1

2

Table 4-12: Footswitch Checks

Task

Set Freeze for right Pedal. Connect Footswitch to one USB port on the system. When scanning in B mode, click right button of Footswitch once.

Click the right pedal of Footswitch once again.

Expected result(s)

Image scanning stops with the latest image on the screen.

Image scanning starts.

USB memory stick checks

1

2

3

Step

Table 4-13: USB memory stick checks

Task

Power on the system.

Connect USB memory stick with USB port on the system.

Click the “New hardware device detector” icon

Expected result(s)

“New hardware device detector” icon display on the status bar.

Check whether the device driver installed successfully.

Barcode Scanner Checks

Step

1

2

Table 4-14: Barcode scanner check

Task

Power on the system.

Connect Barcode Scanner via the USB port on the system.

Expected result(s)

A beep should be heard.

4-60 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Chapter 5

Components and Functions

(Theory)

This chapter explains LOGIQ e’s system concepts, component arrangement, and subsystem functions.

It also describes the power distribution and the

Common Service Desktop interface.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

5-1

Components and Functions (Theory)

Overview

Contents in this chapter

• ‘Overview’ on page 5-2

• ‘Block Diagram and Theory’ on page 5-3

• ‘Power Diagram’ on page 5-5

• ‘Common Service Platform’ on page 5-7

5-2 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Block Diagram and Theory

Block Diagram and Theory

Contents in this Section

• ‘Block Diagram’ on page 5-3

• ‘General Information’ on page 5-4

• ‘Top Console’ on page 5-4

Block Diagram

L 6DO C K ING

C A R T

C ONN

K B D

L 6IO

U s er P orts

C harger and

S witc h

B attery pack (8 cells )

C ONN

L 6WDC

LV P S HV P S

C ONN

F ull S ys

L 6L C D P anel

WMS T : G F I+T R X128

C O M-E module

Intel Mobile C P U

2610u@ 25W i7@ 2 core, 2 thread mS ATA

S S D

S D C AR D

P C I-E

DS P

@ B ridge

T E E

E MIF

F P G A

Mid-

P roces s ing

R F data& S C I

F P G A

B F64

F P G A

B F 64

C ONN

L 6C W D(O P T)

AF E x128

P uls ers x128

B GA C onn.

L6P F P C

C onn

R S

128 Conn

L 6MultP ort

Figure 5-1. LOGIQ e System Block Diagram

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

5-3

Components and Functions (Theory)

General Information

LOGIQ e is an ultrasound imaging scanner.

The system can be used for:

• 2D Black and White imaging

• 2D Color Flow

• M-Mode Black and White imaging

• Doppler

• A number of combinations of the above

LOGIQ e is a digital beam forming system that can handle up to

128 elements linear probes.

Signal flow from the Probe Connector Panel to the Front End, to the Mid Processors and Back End Processor and finally to the

LCD and peripherals.

System configuration is stored on a hard disk drive and all necessary software is loaded from the hard disk drive on power up.

Top Console

The Top Console includes a Standby/On switch, a keyboard, different controls for manipulating the picture quality, controls for use in Measure & Analyze (M&A), and loudspeakers for stereo sound output (used during Doppler scanning).

5-4 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Power Diagram

Power Diagram

Contents in this Section

• ‘Overview’ on page 5-5

• ‘AC Power’ on page 5-5

• ‘Battery Charging’ on page 5-6

• ‘Air Flow Distribution’ on page 5-6

Overview

The AC Power assy’s main tasks are to isolate and output to the

DC/DC unit which is inside the system console. The input of AC power pack will be the AC outlet and it’s universal, the range is

AC 90V-264V, 47-63Hz. And no main power switch located on this power pack.

AC Power

The mains cord has plugs in one side end. A male plug connects to the mains outlet on site.

The mains voltage is routed to the AC power pack through a

Circuit Breaker located on the site.

The Circuit Breaker is of the auto fuse type, if for some reason the current grows to high, the switch will automatically break the power.

From the Main Circuit Breaker, the AC power is routed via an

Inrush Current Limiter to a internal outlet connector for the

Mains Transformer.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

5-5

Components and Functions (Theory)

Battery Charging

The charging circuit is lithium-Ion battery charge and discharge controller. This block can switch the power between the battery and the output of AC Pack. If the output of AC Pack is available, the power input of Charge Board Unit should be from the AC

Pack and the battery will be charged if it’s not full. This block will be also in charge of the battery charging monitor to avoid the battery over heat and over charging, charging will be shut off automatically if battery is charged fully. The battery will discharge to provide the power to the system when out of AC power pack output or AC line.

Air Flow Distribution

5-6

Figure 5-2. Air Flow Inside the System

The two air flow passes allow the scanner to be cooled down as shown in the figure above.

• Path A (Bottom front > CPU Assy > Bottom left) for TMST &

CPU Assy cooling.

• Path B (Bottom front > PWA Assy > Bottom right) for PWA cooling.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Common Service Platform

Common Service Platform

Contents in this Chapter

• ‘Introduction’ on page 5-7

• ‘The usage for security cable’ on page 5-8

• ‘Global Service User Interface (GSUI)’ on page 5-9

• ‘Service Login’ on page 5-9

• ‘Access/Security’ on page 5-10

• ‘Customer Service Home Page’ on page 5-13

Introduction

The Service Platform contains a set of software modules that are common to all PC backend ultrasound and cardiology systems. The Common Service Platform will increase service productivity and reduce training and service costs.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

5-7

Components and Functions (Theory)

The usage for security cable

The ultrasound system equipped with Kensington security slot which is compatible with a Kensington security cable.

Figure 5-3. Security slot

How to prevent unauthorized removal of the ultrasound system?

1. Wrap the cable around the immovable object

2. Make sure and rotate the key to the right (unlocked position)

3. Insert the lock into the Kensington security slot in the system side cover

4. Rotate the key to the left (locked position).

5. For more information, visit www.kensington.com

5-8

Figure 5-4. Security slot and system

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Common Service Platform

Global Service User Interface (GSUI)

Service Login

Select Utility -> Service. This button links the user or the Field

Engineer (FE) to the service login screen.

Figure 5-5. Service Login Screen

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

5-9

Components and Functions (Theory)

Access/Security

The service interface has different access and security user levels. Each user is only granted access to the tools that are authorized for their use

NOTE: A Service Dongle is necessary for use by GE Service when performing proprietary level diagnostics. Online Center access to the scanner requires the password and they must have

“Disruptive” permission and customer input to run diagnostics.

Table 5-1: Service Login User Levels

User Level

Operator

Administrator

External Service

GE Service

Access Authorization

Authorized access to specified diagnostics, error logs and utilities. Same acquisition diagnostic tests as GE Service.

Knowledge of a service level password.

A physical Service Key (Dongle) required

Password

uls uls gogems

Rotating security password

NOTE: For GE Field Engineer, the password changes at specific intervals. Access with the password is tied to the service key.

Every access request, whether successful or not, will be logged into a service access log that is viewable to authorized users.

5-10 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Common Service Platform

Access/Security (continued)

NOTE: If the following window displays unauthorized access prohibited after input of correct password to try to login, do the followings:

Figure 5-6. Authentication Failure

1. Close the Login window.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Figure 5-7. Date/Time

5-11

Components and Functions (Theory)

Access/Security (continued)

4. Change the Date/Time to the current date. Select OK and select Save to save the current date.

Figure 5-8. Date/Time

5. Select Utility -> Service and try to login again.

5-12 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Common Service Platform

Customer Service Home Page

Enter customer service home page with customer level and password.

Figure 5-9. Customer Service Home Page

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

5-13

Components and Functions (Theory)

5-14 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Chapter 6

Service Adjustments

This chapter describes how to test and make adjustments to the LOGIQ e. You can use these to test the system for errors.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

6-1

Service Adjustments

LCD Monitor adjustments

Purpose of this section

This section describes how to test and adjust the scanner.

These tests are optional. You may use them to check the system for errors.

Monitor Adjustments

1. To adjust the brightness and volume:

1. On the alphanumeric keyboard,

• adjust brightness with the Ctrl + Up/Down keys;

• adjust volume with the Ctrl + Left/Right keys

6-2

1. Brightness

2. Volume

Figure 6-1.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Chapter 7

Diagnostics/Troubleshooting

This chapter describes how to setup and run the tools and software that help maintain image quality and system operation. Very basic host, system and board levels are run whenever power is applied. Some

Service Tools may be run at the application level.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

7-1

Diagnostics/Troubleshooting

Overview

Contents in this chapter

• ‘Overview’ on page 7-2

• ‘Gathering Trouble Data’ on page 7-3

• ‘USB Quick Save’ on page 7-7

• ‘Screen Capture’ on page 7-9

• ‘Global Service User Interface (GSUI)’ on page 7-13

• ‘Network Configuration’ on page 7-17

7-2 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Gathering Trouble Data

Gathering Trouble Data

Overview

There may be a time when it would be advantageous to capture trouble images and system data (logs) for acquisition to be sent back to the manufacturer for analysis. There are different options to acquire this data that would give different results

Contents in this Section

• ‘Overview’ on page 7-3

• ‘Collect Vital System Information’ on page 7-3

• ‘Collect a Trouble Image with Logs’ on page 7-5

Collect Vital System Information

The following information is necessary in order to properly analyze data or images being reported as a malfunction or being returned to the manufacturer:

Product Name = LOGIQ e

From the Utility>System>About screen:

Applications Software

System Image Software

• Image Part Number

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

7-3

Diagnostics/Troubleshooting

Collect Vital System Information (continued)

System Hardware

Click and open Additional About Information for hardware information: Module Name, Revision and Part Number.

•

Module Name

This column indicates the hardware modules which are supported on the system.

•

Revision

This column displays the information of the hardware. The

“--” mark in the cell of this column indicates that the hardware in the same row is not installed on the system.

•

Part Number

This column indicates the part number of the hardware. The

“--” mark indicates that there is no part number display for the hardware in the same row.

Figure 7-1. Hardware Information

7-4 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Gathering Trouble Data

Collect a Trouble Image with Logs

If the system should malfunction, press the Alt+D keys simultaneously. This will collect a screen capture of the image monitor, system presets and the following logs:

• Keyboard Shadow Log

• Temperature

NOTE: Power Supply and Temperature logs are not currently being updated by the LOGIQ e.

This Alt+D function is available at all times.

Figure 7-2. Alt+D Dialog Box

When Alt+D is pressed, a menu box appears that allows for:

• A place to enter a description of the problem

• A choice to store to a pre-formatted DVD-R, RD

(Removable Disk) or to the Export directory D:\SERVICE.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

7-5

Diagnostics/Troubleshooting

Collect a Trouble Image with Logs (continued)

Use a log to if the user wants to send information to GE. There are two methods to follow:

The subsequent file is compressed and time stamped. The screen capture is a bitmap which eliminates the possibility of artifacts from compression.

• To save log files and an image snapshot, press Alt+D, select the save logs function, and fill in the form. Use a USB flash drive or CD-R to store the log(s). When you fill out the form, fill in the system behavior you saw, plus any other comments. Fill in the check box if the system crashed.

• To save log files and an image snapshot, press Alt+D.

Describe the issues, then select to store logs to

D:\SERVICE. Select ContactGE in Service Menu, then complete the form of Contact Information, Problem Type and Problem Description and select Send.

7-6 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

USB Quick Save

USB Quick Save

Overview

There may be times when the customer or field engineer will want to directly save images into USB memory. This is accomplished by saving individual Cine clips (moving images- avi format) or still images (jpg format) directly to a USB memory disk by pressing a Print Key.

The P3 key is the factory default print key to accomplish the

USB Quick Save. However, the default is for the Image Area only or the customer may have customized the default Key function.

Check and Record the P3 Key Function

Check the function of the default Key in the event that the customer may have made some customized settings.

The Connectivity/Buttons Screen will be displayed.

Figure 7-3. Buttons Set Up Screen

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

7-7

Diagnostics/Troubleshooting

Check and Record the P3 Key Function (continued)

P3 is the factory default USB Quick Save key. If it is not set to Image Area, proceed to step 5 to record the customer’s customized settings.

5. In the Destinations section, record the service that is displayed. parameters related to the service.

Setting the P3 Key to USB Quick Save

If the P3 Key is not set to USB Quick Save:

1. While on the Connectivity screen, with the Buttons tab displayed, go to the Destinations list.

2. From the list select USB Quick Save. Press [>>] to add the selection to the Printflow View section.

7-8

Figure 7-4. Set P3 Key to USB Quick Save

3. Ensure that the Physical Print Buttons section for capture

Area is set to Image Area and No Image Compression.

4. The P3 Key should now be set up for USB Quick Save, sending the images directly to the USB memory

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Screen Capture

Screen Capture

There may be times when the customer or field engineer will want to capture a presentation on the screen. This is accomplished by first saving the image(s) to the clipboard using a Print Key.

There’s no factory default print key to accomplish a secondary screen capture. However, customer may have customize any of

Print Key function. Print1, Print2 and Print3 are the same.

Therefore, screen capture should involve the following steps:

1. Check and record any custom settings for the Print1 button

2. Set the Print1 button to Whole Screen, Secondary Capture.

3. Capture the required screens to the Hard Disk Drive or

DVD-R.

4. Restore the Print1 button to it’s original settings.

Contents in this Section

• ‘Check and Record the P1 Key Function’ on page 7-10

• ‘Setting the P1 Key to Screen Capture’ on page 7-10

• ‘Capturing a Screen’ on page 7-11

• ‘Reset the P1 Key to Customer’s Functionality’ on

page 7-12

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

7-9

Diagnostics/Troubleshooting

Check and Record the P1 Key Function

Check the function of the Print1 Key in the event that the customer may have made some custom settings.

The Connectivity/Buttons Screen will be displayed.

If P1 is not set to Whole Screen, proceed to step 5 to record the customer’s customized settings.

Figure 7-5. Connectivity/Button screen

5. In the Destinations section, record the service that is displayed.

parameters related to the service.

Setting the P1 Key to Screen Capture

If the P1 Key is not set to screen capture:

1. While on the Connectivity screen, with the Buttons tab displayed, go to the Destinations list.

2. From the list select Copy To Dataflow. Press [>>] to add the selection to the Printflow View section.

3. Ensure that the Physical Print Buttons section for capture

Area is set to Whole Screen, secondary Capture and No

Image Compression.

4. The P1 Key should now be set up for whole screen capture, sending the screens to the image buffer (clipboard).

7-10 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Screen Capture

Capturing a Screen

The following is a generic process to capture any screen from the scanner:

1. Navigate to and display the image/screen to be captured.

“clipboard” displayed at the bottom of the scan image display.

Figure 7-6. Select Image to Capture screen and the snapshots displayed on the bottom.

4. Highlight the snapshot to be stored

5. Select Menu on the right side of the image screen, then highlight and select Save As.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Figure 7-7. Menu > Save As

7-11

Diagnostics/Troubleshooting

Capturing a Screen (continued)

6. A Save dialog box will be opened. Select Save first, and

Select Transfer to CD/DVD to save the image on the CD/

DVD

Figure 7-8. Save Dialog Box

Reset the P1 Key to Customer’s Functionality

If the customer had programmed the P3 Key to a function other than screen capture, restore that functionality recorded in section ‘Check and Record the P1 Key Function’ on page 7-10 .

Refer to Figure 7-5 on page 7-10 .

2. Select Connectivity -> Button.

5, Section ‘Check and Record the P1 Key Function’ on

page 7-10

.

related to the service recorded in step 6, section ‘Check and

Record the P1 Key Function’ on page 7-10 .

7-12 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Global Service User Interface (GSUI)

Global Service User Interface

(GSUI)

Contents in This Section

• ‘Common Diagnostics’ on page 7-13

• ‘Restart the system after diagnostics’ on page 7-16

Common Diagnostics

Utilities

Provides two selections:

•

Disruptive Mode

Allows you to enable or disable disruptive mode troubleshooting.

•

System Shutdown

Allows for system shutdown from the diagnostic menu.

Select to Restart System or Shutdown System. Also, select to retain Disruptive Mode or Not.

After submitting to restart or shutdown a confirmation screen gives one last chance to confirm or cancel the request.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

7-13

Diagnostics/Troubleshooting

PC

• Essential Test tests: PCI, PCI Express, CPU, Memory, HD

Disk and Video.

• Hard Drive Long: tests functionality of the hard drive.

• Hard Drive Short: tests functionality of the hard drive.

• Memory: tests the memory on the mother board.

• Network Adapter: Network calbe must be connected.

• Video: tests functionality of video adapters.

PC Interactive

•

AVI playback tests playing back an AVI file.

• Click “Play” to run the test. If the test is successful, you will see a brief video clipo with audio. For more information about the test, click “More Information”.

• Click “Pass” if the test successfully reproduces the video clip.

• Click “Fail” if the test is unable to successfully reproduce the video clip.

• Click “Cancel” button to quit the test without recording a test result.

•

Keyboard

• Press each key on the keyboard and it will be added to the History. Hold down a key to test the repeat of that key. To cancel, click Cancel or press Alt+X.

• Special purpose keys like volume control or Internet access keys may not be detected. To test the Fn key of a notebook computer, hold down the Fn key while pressing another key.

• Note: This diagnostic is intended to verify keyboard keys are in good working order. It is not intended to verify that keyboards produce desired characters.

7-14 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Global Service User Interface (GSUI)

PC Interactive (continued)

•

Monitor Test Patterns

• This test is composed of various elements that verify a monitor functions correctly. To test a monitor feature, click the appropriate button. You can return to this dialog by clicking the mouse button or pressing any key.

• The Combination Test helps you verify your monitor is properly aligned, and set at the correct color depth and resolution. Use the crosshair pattern in each corner of the screen to visually determine if the monitor aligns correctly. If the crosshairs appear distorted or out of focus, a problem may exist with the monitor alignment.

Use the color spectrum array for visually verifying the monitor color depth capacity. If the colors in the color spectrum do no blend smoothly together, a problem may exist with the monitor color depth. Use the graduated horizontal and vertical alignment bars to determine the monitor resolution capabilities. The better you can discern individual lines as they move closer together, the higher the resolution capabilities of the monitor.

• The Solid Color Test helps point out malfunctioning or dysfunctional pixels using five basic colors: red, green, blue, black, and white. Fill the screen with an appropriate color by clicking the associated button. If a pixel is malfunctioning, the pixel color will contrast with the color of all other pixels.

• The VESA Test Patterns allow you to test the monitor for proper luminance, geometry and focus. Click the appropriate button to fill the screen with the associated test pattern. You can return to this dialog by clicking the mouse button or pressing any key.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

7-15

Diagnostics/Troubleshooting

PC Interactive (continued)

•

Trackball

• The Mouse Status Test verifies the cursor position and mouse button state. When a mouse button is pressed, the corresponding button on the picture will change color. If the mouse is a wheel or scroll mouse, an arrow will indicate the direction the wheel is being rotated.

Clicking the wheel will flash the picture of the mouse in the Mouse Status Test area.

• The Drag and Drop Test verifies a mouse can successfully perform drag and drop operations. Left click the picture of the CD and drag is onto the picture of the drive. If successful, the picture will change.

• The Double Click Test verifies a mouse can successfully perform double-click operations. Double-click on the picture of the monitor. If successful, the picture will change.

•

Sound Test generates sounds for testing the speakers.

•

USB Ports Test lists USB Devices.

Restart the system after diagnostics

Figure 7-9. USB Ports Test

Always shutdown the system and reboot after a diagnostics session.

7-16 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Network Configuration

Network Configuration

Contents in This Section

• ‘Network Configuration’ on page 7-17

• ‘Wire-LAN Network’ on page 7-17

• ‘Wireless LAN Network’ on page 7-19

Network Configuration

Wire-LAN Network

1. Connect system with network.

window, check Enable DHCP, and select the proper network speed in Network Speed.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Figure 7-10. Enable DHCP

7-17

Diagnostics/Troubleshooting

Network Configuration (continued)

NOTE: If user wants to setup static IP address, uncheck Enable

DHCP option, input static address in IP-Address box,

Subnet Mask and Default Gateway box. In Network

Speed, choose the proper speed available.

Figure 7-11. Input static address restart the system and activate the changes.

7-18

Figure 7-12. System Restart inquiry dialog

4. After the system restarts, the network icon at the left bottom of screen turns green.

Figure 7-13. Network icon

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Network Configuration

Wireless LAN Network

2. Enter Utility -> Connectivity.

3. In the Section of Wireless Network, select Configuration.

Figure 7-14. Wireless Network configuration

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

7-19

Diagnostics/Troubleshooting

7-20 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Chapter 8

Replacement Procedures

This chapter describes how to remove and install, or replace, modules and subsystems in the LOGIQ e. It also includes instructions for installing and re-installing the software.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

8-1

Replacement Procedures

Overview

Contents in this chapter

• ‘Overview’ on page 8-2

• ‘Warnings and important information’ on page 8-3

• ‘Disassembly/Re-assembly’ on page 8-5

• ‘Loading the software’ on page 8-13

8-2 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Warnings and important information

Warnings and important information

Warnings

WARNING

Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ e.

When servicing parts of the Ultrasound system where there is exposure to voltage greater than 30 volts:

1. Follow LOCK OUT/TAG OUT procedures.

2. Turn off the breaker.

3. Unplug the Ultrasound system.

4. Maintain control of the Ultrasound system power plug.

5. Wait for at least 30 seconds for capacitors to discharge as there are no test points to verify isolation.

Ultrasound System components may be energized.

WARNING

Because of the limited access to cabinets and equipment in the field, placing people in awkward positions, GE has limited the lifting weight for one person in the field to 16 KG (35 LBS).

Anything over 16 KG (35 LBS) requires 2 people.

WARNING

DO NOT touch any boards with integrated circuits prior to taking the necessary ESD precautions.

Always connect yourself, via an arm-wrist strap, to the advised

ESD connection point located on the rear of the Ultrasound system (near the power connector).

Follow general guidelines for handling of electrostatic sensitive equipment.

NOTE: Use an ESD compatible work space or the ESD-kit during parts replacement.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

8-3

Replacement Procedures

Warnings (continued)

WARNING

The waste of electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed as unsorted municipal waste and must be collected separately.

Please contact the manufacturer or other authorized disposal company to decommission your equipment.

Returning/shipping probes and repair parts

Equipment being returned must be clean and free of blood and other infectious substances.

GE policy states that body fluids must be properly removed from any part or equipment prior to shipment. GE employees, as well as customers, are responsible for ensuring that parts/equipment have been properly decontaminated prior to shipment. Under no circumstance should a part or equipment with visible body fluids be taken or shipped from a clinic or site (for example, body coils or an ultrasound probe). The purpose of the regulation is to protect employees in the transportation industry, as well as the people who will receive or open this package.

NOTE: The US Department of Transportation (DOT) has ruled that

“items that were saturated and/or dripping with human blood that are now caked with dried blood; or which were used or intended for use in patient care” are “regulated medical waste” for transportation purposes and must be transported as a hazardous material.

8-4 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Disassembly/Re-assembly

Disassembly/Re-assembly

Warning and Caution

WARNING

ONLY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL SHOULD

REMOVE ANY COVERS OR PANELS. ELECTRICAL

HAZARDS EXISTS AT SEVERAL POINTS INSIDE.

BECOME THOROUGHLY FAMILIAR WITH ALL

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES AND HIGH CURRENT

LEVELS TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL CONTACT

CAUTION

Do not wear the ESD wrist strap when you work on live circuits and more than 30V peak is present.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

8-5

Replacement Procedures

Handle Assy (Part No. 5483188)

Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the

Handle Assy.

Tools

• Common Phillips screwdrivers

Needed Manpower

• 1 person, 5 minutes + travel

Preparation

• Shut down the system, disconnect the AC/DC power cord and remove the battery.

Removal Procedure

1.

No.

Table 8-1: Removal Procedure for Handle Assy

Steps

Unscrew 2 handles caps on both sides of the system by rotating the cap counterclockwise.

Corresponding Graphic

2. Pull out the handle.

Mounting Procedure

1. Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.

8-6 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Disassembly/Re-assembly

Advanced Isolation Cart Components Replacement

Basket of Advanced Isolation Cart (Part No. 5571410)

Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the

Basket of Advanced Isolation Cart.

Tools

• Common Phillips screwdrivers

Needed Manpower

• 1 person, 2 minute + travel

Preparation

• Power off the Advanced Isolation Cart and disconnect the

AC/DC power cord.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

8-7

Replacement Procedures

Removal Procedure

No.

1.

Table 8-2: Removal Procedure for Basket

Steps

Unscrew the 1 screw under the basket.

Corresponding Graphic

2. Hold the basket with both hands and push it up.

3. Remove the basket from the Upper

Column.

Mounting Procedure

1. Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.

8-8 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Disassembly/Re-assembly

Drawer of Advanced Isolation Cart (Part No. 5571411)

Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the

Drawer of Advanced Isolation Cart.

Tools

• Common Phillips screwdrivers

Needed Manpower

• 1 person, 2 minute + travel

Preparation

• Power off the Advanced Isolation Cart and disconnect the

AC/DC power cord.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

8-9

Replacement Procedures

Removal Procedure

No.

1.

Table 8-3: Removal Procedure for Drawer

Steps

Unscrew the 1 screw under the drawer.

Corresponding Graphic

2. Hold the drawer with both hands and push it up.

3. Remove the drawer from the Upper

Column.

Mounting Procedure

1. Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.

8-10 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Disassembly/Re-assembly

3-Probe Port of Advanced Isolation Cart (Part No. 5571412)

Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the

3-Probe Port of Advanced Isolation Cart.

Tools

• Common Phillips screwdrivers

Needed Manpower

• 1 person, 2 minute + travel

Preparation

• Power off the Advanced Isolation Cart and disconnect the

AC/DC power cord.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

8-11

Replacement Procedures

Removal Procedure

Table 8-4: Removal Procedure for 3-Probe Port

No.

1.

Steps

Unscrew the 1 screw under the 3-Probe

Port.

Corresponding Graphic

2. Hold the 3-Probe Port with both hands and push it up.

3. Remove the 3-Probe Port from the

Upper Column.

Mounting Procedure

1. Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.

8-12 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Loading the software

Loading the software

Contents in This Section

• ‘Purpose of this section’ on page 8-13

• ‘Customer provided prerequisite’ on page 8-13

• ‘Data Management - moving all images’ on page 8-14

• ‘Backing up the Patient Archive and System Configurations’ on page 8-14

• ‘Recording important settings and parameters’ on page 8-15

• ‘Loading the System Software’ on page 8-16

• ‘Loading the System Software with USB memory stick’ on

page 8-16

• ‘Software Version check out’ on page 8-22

• ‘Reload the Correct Preset Region’ on page 8-23

• ‘Option Strings Check’ on page 8-24

• ‘Probe Recognition Check’ on page 8-25

• ‘Peripheral Device Check’ on page 8-25

• ‘Reinstall DICOM Devices’ on page 8-26

Purpose of this section

This section describes how to reinstall software on LOGIQ e.

Customer provided prerequisite

• Formatted and labelled media for Images storage.

• Formatted and labelled media for Patient Archive and

Presets (User Defined Settings).

• Password for the user ADM.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

8-13

Replacement Procedures

Data Management - moving all images

CAUTION

An error, or a power loss may occur.

Always backup the Patient Archive and the Presets (System

Configurations) before loading the software!

In order to complete a successful restore of the Patient

Database, as needed after a hard disk replacement, or if all the content on the hard disk has been erased, the images must be moved away from LOGIQ e before doing backup of the Patient

Database.

Depending on the location set-up, either move the images to a remote server or to removable media like DVD or CD discs.

• Move the images to a remote server or to removable media.

For instructions, please see “Disk management” in the User

Manual/User Guide.

Backing up the Patient Archive and System Configurations

CAUTION

An error, or a power loss may occur.

Always backup the Patient Archive and the Presets (System

Configurations) before loading the software!

In order to complete a successful restore of the Patient

Database, as needed after a hard disk replacement, or if all the content on the hard disk has been erased, the images must be moved away from LOGIQ e before doing backup of the Patient

Database.

Depending on the location set-up, either move the images to a remote server or to removable media like DVD or CD discs.

• Backup the Patient Archive and System Configurations.

For instructions, please see “Data Backup and Restore” in the User Manual/User Guide.

8-14 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Loading the software

Recording important settings and parameters

Overview

CAUTION

An error, or a power loss may occur.

It is considered to be best practice to always keep a record on paper of the settings for the LOGIQ e. Verify if it is current before you start to load software!

Always keep a record of the settings for the LOGIQ e on paper.

Verify if it is current before starting a software loading! If needed, record the settings.

This subsection includes descriptions for recording data from the following screens:

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

8-15

Replacement Procedures

Loading the System Software

WARNING

While the software install procedure is designed to preserved data, you should save any patient data, images, system setups and customer presets to CD,

DVD, USB Flash Drive, or USB Hard Disk before doing a software upgrade.

NOTE: Before loading the system software, please ensure that the power can be continuously supplied and there is no risk of power cut off during loading procedure.

There are two methods to load the system software:

• Load the system software with USB memory stick.

Loading the System Software with USB memory stick

NOTE: Before starting this procedure, remove all probes and peripherals and remove them from the Docking Cart.

NOTE: While it is believed to be unnecessary, it would not hurt to disconnect the system from the network and remove all transducer.

NOTE: Please ensure AC adapter is connected during system upgrade!

NOTE:

1. Insert the USB memory stick labeled “System & Application

Software” to the system.

2. Properly turn off the scanner by momentarily pressing the

Power On/Off Switch. In System-Exit window, select

Shutdown to shutdown the system.

If the system will not shutdown normally, hold down the

Power On/Off Switch until the light turns off.

3. Power on the system. The system will detect the USB memory stick automatically.

8-16 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Loading the software

Loading the System Software with USB memory stick (continued)

4. Press any key to continue when below message displays.

Figure 8-1. Upgrade message

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

8-17

Replacement Procedures

Loading the System Software with USB memory stick (continued)

5. Select one of the options for loading the system. Select choice [a] to load the complete disk.

CAUTION

NOTE:

NOTE:

If you select [a], ALL existing software and data will be erased.

If backup has not been performed, all data like Patient

Database, System Configuration and User Configurations

(Customer Presets) will be lost.

• To select [a], the complete disk will be loaded. This option is recommended for application software upgrade.

When to select [a] to load complete disk, please ensure that any patient data on the disk has been backed up.

• To select [b], only the bootable C: partition is loaded.

This option is intended for recovery of a system that will not boot up. It is not recommended for application software upgrade because during upgrade process, the data on the system would possibly be impacted.

• To select [c] to quit system upgrade process.

• To select [e] to erase the complete disk. This process will erase all patient data and all existing software on the system. (For R9.x.x only)

Do not select [e] for loading system software.

8-18 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Loading the software

Loading the System Software with USB memory stick (continued)

Figure 8-2. System Software load instruction (For R8.x.x)

Figure 8-3. System Software load instruction (For R9.x.x)

WARNING

While the software install procedure is designed to preserve data, you should select choice [b] to format disk

C only.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

8-19

Replacement Procedures

Loading the System Software with USB memory stick (continued)

6. Input “Yes” or “No” and press Enter key to continue.

WARNING

Figure 8-4. Confirmation on loading the system

7. System USB memory stick will be loading. Wait for the software installation to complete. (Typical installation time:

5-10 minutes). Status bar on the screen indicates progress.

Do not interrupt the software loading at any time.

8-20

Figure 8-5. Loading status

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Loading the software

Loading the System Software with USB memory stick (continued)

NOTE:

8. After finish updating system, remove the USB memory stick and press any key to shut down the system.

If you don not remove the USB memory stick, the software system loading process repeats when the system boots up.

Figure 8-6. System upgrade complete

9. Restart the system.

If you select [a] to load the complete disk, the following steps are required.

a. Enter the system’s Serial Number and select OK. The system’s Serial Number is at the bottom of the system.

Press On/Off switch to restart the system.

Figure 8-7. System Serial Number b. After the system restarts, enter the software license and select OK. The system will enter into scan mode.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Figure 8-8. Software license

8-21

Replacement Procedures

Software Version check out

Functional Check-out

1. Power on LOGIQ e system and wait until system booting to main screen.

Figure 8-9. About

4. Check whether “Software Version” is the right version for use.

Figure 8-10. Software version

8-22 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Loading the software

Reload the Correct Preset Region

NOTE: After the system software loading completion, please reload the correct preset region.

1. Reboot the system.

Preset Region.

Figure 8-11. Preset Region

4. Reboot the system.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

8-23

Replacement Procedures

Option Strings Check

NOTE: After the system software loading completion, please check the option strings to ensure that the options are activated and working.

1. Reboot the system.

2. Select Utility -> Admin -> System Admin.

3. Enter the option keys into the Enter New Option Key field and press Add.

4. Ensure that all the install option keys are displayed and the status of Options are valid.

• The status “Valid” means the option keys are activated and working.

• The status “disabled” means the option keys are not activated and not working. Check if the option is installed and if the serial number and option key are correct.

8-24

Figure 8-12. Option strings

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Loading the software

Probe Recognition Check

NOTE: After the system software loading completion, please check to ensure that the system can recognize the probes.

Plug in the probe. In scanning mode, the probe information is displayed on the right top location of the screen. About the probe specification for intended use on LOGIQ e.

Plug in at least one of each type of the probes and check if each of the probes is recognized and the probe information is displayed correctly.

Figure 8-13. Probe identification

Peripheral Device Check

Check to ensure that all the peripheral devices work properly.

For instruction of peripheral device check, See ‘Peripheral

Checks’ on page 4-52 for more information.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

8-25

Replacement Procedures

Reinstall DICOM Devices

Reinstall any DICOM devices used by the customers and check to ensure these DICOM devices work properly.

The instruction about installing DICOM devices is not incorporated in this manual. To access the instruction about installing DICOM devices please refer to another manual Basic

User Manual. Please use the latest revision of this document.

8-26 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Chapter 9

Renewal Parts

This chapter lists the renewal parts available for the

LOGIQ e.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

9-1

Renewal Parts

Contents in this chapter

• ‘Overview’ on page 9-2

• ‘List of Abbreviations’ on page 9-2

• ‘Renewal Parts Lists’ on page 9-3

List of Abbreviations

Table 9-1: List of Abbreviations

3D

Assy

ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION

THREE DIMENSIONAL

ASSEMBLY

KBD Keyboard

LCD Liquid Crystal Display

BnV Brightness and Volume

WMST Master Board

Overview

9-2 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Renewal Parts Lists

Renewal Parts Lists

Contents in This Section

• ‘Power Cable’ on page 9-4

• ‘Operator Console Assy’ on page 9-5

• ‘LCD Assy’ on page 9-6

• ‘Keyboard Assy’ on page 9-7

• ‘Bottom Assy’ on page 9-9

• ‘E-Isolation Cart and Advanced Isolation Cart’ on page 9-14

• ‘Accessories and Kits’ on page 9-17

• ‘Probe’ on page 9-20

• ‘Manuals’ on page 9-22

NOTE: The part replacement is shown by the “Replaced By” column in the table. If the part is replaced by a new version, the new version is shown in the “Replaced By” column in the table. The item number for the new version will have a letter in the alphabetical order after the Arabic numerals. For example, the new version in item 300A will replace the parts or only some parts in the item 300. The parts in item 300 which are replaced by item 300A will have the part number of new version in the

“Replaced By” column. The parts in item 300 which are not replaced do not have a new version in the “Replaced By” column.

NOTE: The software R8.x.x and R9.x.x which are used to distinguish the different features of the system in all the manuals only refer to the systems which are originally installed with the software version R8.x.x and R9.x.x. Not all the features of R9.x.x will be supported when upgrading the software from R8.x.x to R9.x.x on the system which is originally installed with software R8.x.x.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

9-3

11

12

13

Item

1

8

9

6

7

10

4

5

2

3

Renewal Parts

Power Cable

Table

9-2: Power Cable List

Part Number

5460229

5177126-2

5177195-2

5177154-2

5177187-3

5177123-2

5176907-2

5176773-2

5176753-2

5176304-2

5177146-2

5177153-2

5400868-2

Description

ACDC Adapter with Clamp Filter

ACDC Power Cable for Japan

ACDC Power Cable for Argentina

ACDC Power Cable for Switzerland

ACDC Power Cable for Australia

ACDC Power Cable for Europe

ACDC Power Cable for United Kingdom

ACDC Power Cable for India

ACDC Power Cable for Israel

ACDC Power Cable for China

ACDC Power Cable for USA

ACDC Power Cable for Denmark

ACDC Power Cable for Brazil

Replaced

By Qty

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

9-4 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Operator Console Assy

Renewal Parts Lists

Figure 9-1. Operator Console Assy

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

9-5

Renewal Parts

LCD Assy

Item

100

Part

Number

5460119

Table 9-3: LCD Assy

Part Name

LOGIQ e LCD Assy

Replaced

By Corresponding graphic Qty

1

102 5483138 LOGIQ e LCD Panel

Kits

103 5419292 LOGIQ e LCD Back

Cover Assy

104 5418452 LOGIQ e LCD Front

Cover

1

1

1

9-6 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Renewal Parts Lists

Keyboard Assy

Item

200

Part

Number

5453774

Table 9-4: Keyboard Assy

Replaced

By Corresponding graphic Part Name

LOGIQ e Keyboard

Assy

Qty

1

201 5446052 LOGIQ e KBD Cover

Assy

1

203 5456388 LOGIQ e AN

Keyboard

204 5451287 LOGIQ e Trackball

Assy

1

1

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

9-7

Renewal Parts

Item

205

Part

Number

5483141

Table 9-4: Keyboard Assy

Replaced

By Corresponding graphic Part Name

LOGIQ e Keyboard

PWA Kits

Qty

1

206 5483143 LOGIQ e TGC Keytop

Kits

207 5483185 LOGIQ e Depth

Keytop Kits

1

1

208 5483189 LOGIQ e Speaker

Kits

209 5154621-2 LOGIQ e KBD cable kits with new KBD cable

1

1

9-8 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Renewal Parts Lists

Bottom Assy

Item

300

Part

Number

5482282

Table 9-5: Bottom Assy

Replaced

By Part Name

Advantech 128G SSD

Model:SQF-SMSM4-

128G-S8C

Corresponding graphic Qty

1

301 5443576 LOGIQ e WDC PWA 1

302 5449310 LOGIQ e CPU

Module

1

1 303 5452099 LOGIQ e Bottom

Cover Assy

304 5462354 LOGIQ e Utility PWA

Assy

1

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

9-9

Renewal Parts

Item

305

Part

Number

5454601

Table 9-5: Bottom Assy

Replaced

By Part Name

LOGIQ e Probe

Connector Assy

Corresponding graphic Qty

1

306 5460069 LOGIQ e Left Fan

Assy

1

307 5458580 LOGIQ e Right Fan

Assy

1

308 5483140 LOGIQ e LCD Hinge and Handle Hinge

Kits

309 5483142 LOGIQ e Main PWA and Heatpipe Kits

(For the system which is originally installed with Software R8.x.x)

1

1

9-10 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Item

310

Part

Number

5451284

Renewal Parts Lists

Table 9-5: Bottom Assy

Replaced

By Part Name

LOGIQ e Battery

Pack

Corresponding graphic Qty

1

311 5483358 LOGIQ e Probe

Connect Lock Kits

312 5419298 LOGIQ e Menu Panel

Assy

313

314

5462567

5422180

LOGIQ e Rubber Kits

LOGIQ e Battery Lock

315 5145407 LOGIQ e CMOS

Battery

316 5484857 Memory Module 1

1

1

1

1

1

317 5490318 OPTKey IC 1

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

9-11

Renewal Parts

Item

318

Part

Number

5452120-S

Table 9-5: Bottom Assy

Part Name

LOGIQ e CWD Board

Replaced

By Corresponding graphic Qty

1

1 319 5483188 LOGIQ e Handle Kits

320 5490737 LOGIQ e Heatpipe

Module Kits

321

322

5483186

5582183

LOGIQ e Screw Kits

LOGIQ e Main PWA and Heatpipe Kits

(For Software R8.0.5 and above)

323 5589352 LOGIQ e Main PWA and Heatpipe Kits

(For the system which is originally instatlled with Software R9.x.x)

1

1

1

9-12 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Item

324

Part

Number

5692065

Renewal Parts Lists

Table 9-5: Bottom Assy

Replaced

By Part Name

LOGIQ e Memory

SO-DIMM

DDR3-1600-4G for

ADV CPU (For R9.x.x only)

Corresponding graphic Qty

1

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

9-13

Renewal Parts

E-Isolation Cart and Advanced Isolation Cart

Item

1400

Part

Number

5507953

Table 9-6: E-Isolation Cart

Replaced

By Corresponding graphic Part Name

E-Isolation Cart

Power Box 220V

Qty

1

1 1401 5507952 E-Isolation Cart

Power Box 110V

1402 5420768-2 Printer Box Assy for

E-Isolation Cart

1

1403 5420771-2 E-Isolation Cart Assy 1

9-14 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Item

1404

Part

Number

5561128-S

Renewal Parts Lists

Table 9-6: E-Isolation Cart

Replaced

By Corresponding graphic Part Name

Advanced Isolation

Cart Assy

Qty

1405 5439000 Front Castor

MYSD-120R for

Advanced Isolation

Cart

1406 5571410 Basket Kits for

Advanced Isolation

Cart

1407 5571411 Drawer Kits for

Advanced Isolation

Cart

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

9-15

Renewal Parts

Item

1410

Part

Number

5571412

Table 9-6: E-Isolation Cart

Replaced

By Corresponding graphic Part Name

3-Probe Port Kits for

Advanced Isolation

Cart

Qty

1411 5426642 Cable Hook Kit for

Advanced Isolation

Cart

1412 5426645 Locate Block and

Screw Cap for

Advanced Isolation

Cart

1413 5426644 Probe and Gel Holder

Kit for Advanced

Isolation Cart

1414 5461076 Rear Handle Kit for

Advanced Isolation

Cart

9-16 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Renewal Parts Lists

Accessories and Kits

Item

400

400A

400B

400C

401

Part

Number

5483317-3

5483317-5

5483317-6

5483317-7

5483187

Table 9-7: Accessories and Kits

Part Name

Software R8.0.3 USB

Replaced

By

5483317-6

Software R8.0.5 USB 5483317-6

Software R8.0.6 USB 5483317-7

Software R8.0.7 USB

LOGIQ e LOGO Kits

Corresponding graphic

1

1

1

1

Qty

1

402

403

403A

404

405

406

407

408

409

409A

410

410A

5491253

5495509

5495509-2

5499686

5133106-2

5133107-2

5133108-2

5133109-2

5151259

5151259-2

5151261

5151261-2

SONY UPD25 Color

Printer Brazil kit

SONY UPD897 BW

Printer Brazil Kit

SONY UPD898MD

BW Printer Brazil Kit

LOGIQ e eSmart

Trainer Japanese

USB Flash Drive

SONY UPD25 Color

Printer CHN kit

SONY UPD25 Color

Printer USA kit

SONY UPD25 Color

Printer EUP kit

SONY UPD25 Color

Printer JPN kit

SONY UPD897 BW

Printer USA Kit

SONY UPD898MD BW

Printer USA Kit

SONY UPD897 BW

Printer Europe Kit

SONY UPD898MD BW

Printer Europe Kit

5495509-2

5151259-2

5151261-2

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

9-17

Renewal Parts

Item

411

Part

Number

5151262

411A

412

412A

413

414

415

416

417

418

419

420

421

422

423

424

425

426

5151262-2

5151263

5151263-2

5421913

5449275-2

5473920

5151236

5446188

5129487

5146056

5146055

5146739

5195563

5177378

5446638

5136239-S

5447716-S

Table 9-7: Accessories and Kits

Part Name

SONY UPD897 BW

Printer China Kit

SONY UPD898MD BW

Printer China Kit

SONY UPD897 BW

Printer Japan Kit

SONY UPD898MD BW

Printer Japan Kit

LOGIQ e eSmartTrainer USB

Flash Drive

TWIN LITEON eUAU108 DVDRW

Kit

NetGear WNA1000M

Wireless USB Micro

Adapter Kit

USB Foot Switch for

LOGIQ e

USB barcode reader

Honeywell

1900GHD-2

ECG module from

Norav Isral

ECG Detachable cable AHA Type USA

USB Cable for ECG

ECG detachable cable IEC type EURO and ASIA

ECG module with

SKD label

SKD ECG Package

English Label

Keeber8G USB Stick

Vet caution label (For

R9.x.x only)

Probe Vet label Kit for

USA (For R9.x.x only)

Replaced

By

5151262-2

5151263-2

Corresponding graphic

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Qty

1

9-18 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Item

427

Part

Number

5720394

Renewal Parts Lists

Table 9-7: Accessories and Kits

Replaced

By Corresponding graphic Part Name

LOGIQ e Vet Kits (For

R9.x.x only)

Qty

1

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

9-19

Renewal Parts

Probe

Item

500

Part

Name

L4-12t-RS

Part

Number

5435010

Table 9-8: Probes for LOGIQ e

Replaced

By Description

Linear Probe

(Frequency

Range: 4.2~13)

Illustration

501 L10-22-RS 5441887 Linear Probe

(Frequency

Range: 10~22)

502 12L-RS 5409291 Linear Probe

(Frequency

Range: 4.2~13)

503 3Sc-RS 47237516 Sector Probe

(Frequency

Range: 1.7~4)

Qty

1

1

1

1

504 8C-RS

505 C1-5-RS

5434194

5499608

Convex Probe

(Frequency

Range: 4.2~11)

Convex Probe

(Frequency

Range: 2~5)

506 L8-18i-RS 5499609 Linear Probe

(Frequency

Range: 6.3~18)

1

1

1

9-20 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Renewal Parts Lists

Item

507

Part

Name

9L-RS

Part

Number

5499511

Table 9-8: Probes for LOGIQ e

Replaced

By Description

Linear Probe

(Frequency

Range: 3~9)

Illustration Qty

1

1 508 6S-RS

509 E8C-RS

5394465

5499516

Sector Probe

(Frequency

Range: 3~7)

Convex Probe

(Frequency

Range: 4.2~10)

1

510 4C-RS 5488477 Linear Probe

(Frequency

Range: 2~15)

(For R9.x.x only)

511 LK760-RS KN10010

6

Linear Probe

(Frequency

Range: 3.5~10)

(For R9.x.x only)

512 6Tc-RS 5548914 Sector Probe

(Frequency

Range: 3~8)

(For R9.x.x only)

1

1

1

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

9-21

Item

600

621

622

623

624

617

618

619

620

625

626

627

613

614

615

616

609

610

611

612

605

606

607

608

601

602

603

604

Renewal Parts

Manuals

5437241-153

5437241-154

5437241-155

5437241-159

5437241-160

5437241-161

5437241-162

5437241-165

5437241-167

5437241-168

5437241-174

5454606-100

5454606-101

5454606-106

5454606-108

5454606-111

5454606-127

5454606-140

5437241-141

5437241-121

5437241-129

5437241-142

5437241-143

5437241-144

5437241-145

5437241-150

5437241-151

Table 9-9: Manuals for LOGIQ e (For R8.x.x)

Part Number

5461614-100

Description

LOGIQ e Service Manual

System User Manual

LOGIQ e Basic User Manual, English

LOGIQ e Basic User Manual, French

LOGIQ e Basic User Manual, Spanish

LOGIQ e Basic User Manual, German

LOGIQ e Basic User Manual, Italian

LOGIQ e Basic User Manual, Brazilian Portuguese

LOGIQ e Basic User Manual, English

LOGIQ e User Guide, Chinese Simplified

LOGIQ e User Guide, Dutch

LOGIQ e User Guide, Estonian

LOGIQ e User Guide, Swedish

LOGIQ e User Guide, Traditional Chinese

LOGIQ e User Guide, Korean

LOGIQ e User Guide, Russian

LOGIQ e User Guide, Polish

LOGIQ e User Guide, Greek

LOGIQ e User Guide, Hungarian

LOGIQ e User Guide, Slovakian

LOGIQ e User Guide, Czech

LOGIQ e User Guide, Turkish

LOGIQ e User Guide, Danish

LOGIQ e User Guide, Norwegian

LOGIQ e User Guide, Finnish

LOGIQ e User Guide, Bulgarian

LOGIQ e User Guide, Romanian

LOGIQ e User Guide, Croatian

LOGIQ e User Guide, Lithuanian

9-22

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Qty

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

651

652

653

647

648

649

650

643

644

645

646

639

640

641

642

634

635

636

637

638

Item

628

629

630

631

632

Item

633

Renewal Parts Lists

Table 9-9: Manuals for LOGIQ e (For R8.x.x)

Part Number

5437241-175

5437241-176

5437241-177

5437241-170

5437241-181

Description

LOGIQ e User Guide, Latvian

LOGIQ e User Guide, Serbian

LOGIQ e User Guide, European Portuguese

LOGIQ e User Guide, Ukrainian

LOGIQ e User Guide, Indonesian

5561643-100

5561643-101

5561643-106

5561643-108

5561643-111

5561643-127

5561643-140

5561645-141

5561645-121

5561645-129

5561645-142

5561645-143

5561645-144

5561645-145

5561645-150

5561645-151

5561645-153

5561645-154

5561645-155

5561645-159

Table 9-10: Manuals for LOGIQ e (For R9.x.x)

Part Number

5561650-100

Description

LOGIQ e Basic Service Manual

System User Manual

LOGIQ e Basic User Manual, English

LOGIQ e Basic User Manual, French

LOGIQ e Basic User Manual, Spanish

LOGIQ e Basic User Manual, German

LOGIQ e Basic User Manual, Italian

LOGIQ e Basic User Manual, Brazilian Portuguese

LOGIQ e Basic User Manual, English

LOGIQ e User Guide, Chinese Simplified

LOGIQ e User Guide, Dutch

LOGIQ e User Guide, Estonian

LOGIQ e User Guide, Swedish

LOGIQ e User Guide, Traditional Chinese

LOGIQ e User Guide, Korean

LOGIQ e User Guide, Russian

LOGIQ e User Guide, Polish

LOGIQ e User Guide, Greek

LOGIQ e User Guide, Hungarian

LOGIQ e User Guide, Slovakian

LOGIQ e User Guide, Czech

LOGIQ e User Guide, Turkish

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Qty

1

Qty

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

9-23

Item

658

659

660

661

654

655

656

657

662

663

664

665

666

Renewal Parts

Table 9-10: Manuals for LOGIQ e (For R9.x.x)

Part Number

5561645-160

5561645-161

5561645-162

5561645-165

5561645-167

5561645-168

5561645-174

5561645-175

5561645-176

5561645-177

5561645-170

5561645-181

5561645-184

Description

LOGIQ e User Guide, Danish

LOGIQ e User Guide, Norwegian

LOGIQ e User Guide, Finnish

LOGIQ e User Guide, Bulgarian

LOGIQ e User Guide, Romanian

LOGIQ e User Guide, Croatian

LOGIQ e User Guide, Lithuanian

LOGIQ e User Guide, Latvian

LOGIQ e User Guide, Serbian

LOGIQ e User Guide, European Portuguese

LOGIQ e User Guide, Ukrainian

LOGIQ e User Guide, Indonesian

LOGIQ e User Guide, Kazakh

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Qty

9-24 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Chapter 10

Care and Maintenance

This chapter describes Care and Maintenance on the

Ultrasound system and peripherals. These procedures are intended to maintain the quality of the Ultrasound

system’s performance. Read this chapter completely and familiarize yourself with the procedures before performing a task.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

10-1

Care and Maintenance

Overview

Contents in this chapter

• ‘Overview’ on page 10-2

• ‘Protecting Health Information’ on page 10-3

• ‘Warnings’ on page 10-12

• ‘Why do maintenance’ on page 10-13

• ‘Maintenance task schedule’ on page 10-15

• ‘Tools required’ on page 10-17

• ‘System maintenance’ on page 10-21

• ‘Electrical safety tests’ on page 10-30

• ‘When there's too much leakage current …’ on page 10-42

• ‘Inspection Paperwork’ on page 10-44

• ‘Electrical Safety Tests Log’ on page 10-46

10-2 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Protecting Health Information

Protecting Health Information

Hide Patient Data

You can preset to display or remove patient information from the scanning screen title bar when scanning or storing images.

Select Utility -> System -> General, preset in the field of Hide

Patient Data in the portion of Title Bar. Select Save.

Figure 10-1. Hide Patient Information

•

Never. When set to this, the patient information is not

removed from title bar when scanning and when storing images.

•

On Store. When set to this, the patient information is

removed from title bar only when storing the images.

• Always. When set to this, the patient information is always removed from the scanning screen title bar when scanning and when storing images.

NOTE: Upon recall of images with measurements, Dual image, the

DICOM image is recalled. In this case, there is no patient data burned into the DICOM image. If you DO NOT want this to occur, set this to Never.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

10-3

Care and Maintenance

Protecting Health Information

Prevent from copying data including Patient Information to external storage device.

Select Utility -> Admin -> System Admin and check the box in the portion of Protecting Health Information (PHI). Select

Save and reboot the system.

10-4

Figure 10-2. Protecting Health Information

Prevent writing patient information to external storage:

Media: USB Memory / SD Card / USB HDD / CD-R / DVD-R

Function: Export / MPEGVue / EZBackup / EZMove / Save As /

Save As Images / Report Save As / Backup Patient Archive and

Report Archive from Utility.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Protecting Health Information

Software Wiping to Erase Patient Data (For R9.x.x only)

You can erase all the patient data with the software to wipe the partitions on the system.

WARNING

The software wiping procedure will erase all the patient data and all existing software on the system. While the software wiping procedure is designed to preserved data, you should save any patient data, images, system setups and customer presets to CD, DVD, USB Flash Drive, or USB Hard Disk before doing a software wiping.

NOTE: Before starting software wiping, please ensure that the power can be continuously supplied and there is no risk of power cut off during loading procedure.

Use the software to wipe the partitions of the system to erase the patient data:

NOTE:

1. Insert USB memory stick labeled “System & Application

Software” to the system.

2. Properly turn off the system by momentarily pressing the

Power/On/Off Switch. In System-Exit window, select

Shutdown to shutdown the system.

If the system will not shut down normally, hold down the

Power On/Off Switch until the light turns off.

3. Power on the system. The system will detect the USB memory stick automatically.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

10-5

Care and Maintenance

Software Wiping to Erase Patient Data (For R9.x.x only) (continued)

4. Press any key to continue when below message displays.

NOTE:

Figure 10-3. Software message

5. Select [e] to erase the complete disk.

All patient data (if any) will be destroyed! Please backup patient data before executing erasing patient data!

10-6

Figure 10-4. Information of erasing patient data

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Protecting Health Information

Software Wiping to Erase Patient Data (For R9.x.x only) (continued)

6. Input “Yes” or “No” and press Enter key to continue.

NOTE:

Figure 10-5. Confirmation on erasing patient data

7. The software is wiping the partitions. Wait for the wiping procedure to complete. On the screen, it displays which partition is in wiping progress and how much has been completed.

Do not interrupt the wiping process at any time until all the partitions wiping is completed.

Figure 10-6. Wiping progress

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

10-7

Care and Maintenance

Software Wiping to Erase Patient Data (For R9.x.x only) (continued)

8. When the all the partitions have been wiped, this message will display on the screen. Remove the USB memory stick and press any key to shut down the system.

Figure 10-7. Software wiping complete

9. The software wiping procedure has erased all existing software. If you want to use the system, you need to load the system software. Refer to ‘Loading the software’ on

page 8-13

for more information about loading the system software.

10-8 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Users

Protecting Health Information

The Users screen allows you to define user IDs. It also allows you to specify operators registration, operator’s rights setting, and registration of staff related to an examination (for example, referring and interpreting physicians).

Select Utility -> Admin -> Users.

Figure 10-8. Users Preset Menu

Preset Parameter

User List

Identity

Group Membership

Operator Rights

Table 10-1: User List

Description

Lists the user ID for all system users.

Type the operator’s user ID, Password, Prefix, Last Name, First Name, Middle

Name, Suffix, Phone Number.

Select the user’s group: Operator (sonographers, doctors, or any person using the ultrasound system); Ref.Phys. (referring physician can be associated to the patient examination in the extended Patient information window); Perf.Phys. – physician performing the exam can be associated to the patient examination in the extended Patient information window.

Admin – If selected, the operator has extended rights with access to the administrative setup functionality. The operator can also perform advanced operations

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

10-9

Care and Maintenance

Creating a user

2. Type the user ID. ENSURE that you DO NOT include the following characters in a user’s ID: slash (/), dash (-), asterisk (*), question mark (?), an underscore (_), ampersand (&), or blank spaces. Also, DO NOT set up a user with the same initials/signifier.

3. Type the user’s information in the Identity section.

4. Select the user’s group(s).

5. If the user needs full configuration and advanced operations access, select Admin.

NOTE: DO NOT add users with the same initials/signifier. The system allows you to do this; however, the first user is erased and only the second remains.

NOTE: When adding a new user, press Add first. Then edit the ID from the default of “NewUser” and edit the other fields. DO NOT press Add again unless you actually want to create another user. Press Save after adding one or more users. The user listed as NewUser on the list will be updated with the edited ID when you re-enter this screen.

Changing a user configuration

2. Make the desired changes.

Deleting a user

The user is removed from the User List

10-10 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Logon

Protecting Health Information

The Logon section defines log on procedures.

Select Utility -> Admin -> Logon.

Preset Parameter

Auto Logon

Common Network Login

Figure 10-9. Administrative Logon Preset Menu

Table 10-2: Logon

Description

Specifies logon procedures:

• When blank, the user must select a user ID and enter a password when logging on.

• When selected, the system is started automatically, using the last user logon.

Specifies the user ID and password used to access the network. User – User

ID for network access; Password – Password for network access

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

10-11

Care and Maintenance

Warnings

DANGER

CAUTION

BE SURE TO DISCONNECT THE ULTRASOUND SYSTEM

POWER PLUG AND OPEN THE MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER

BEFORE YOU REMOVE ANY PARTS. BE CAUTIOUS

WHENEVER POWER IS STILL ON AND COVERS ARE

REMOVED.

Practice good ESD prevention. Wear an anti–static strap when handling electronic parts and even when disconnecting/ connecting cables.

CAUTION

Do not pull out or insert circuit boards while power is on.

CAUTION

Do not operate this Ultrasound system unless all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. System performance and cooling require this.

10-12 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Why do maintenance

Why do maintenance

Periodic maintenance inspections

It has been determined by engineering that your LOGIQ e does not have any high wear components that fail with use, therefore no Periodic Maintenance inspections are mandatory.

However, some customers’ Quality Assurance Programs may require additional tasks and or inspections at a different frequency than listed in this manual.

Keeping records

It is good business practice that ultrasound facilities maintain records of periodic and corrective maintenance. The Ultrasound

Periodic Maintenance Inspection Certificate provides the customer with documentation that the Ultrasound system is maintained on a periodic basis.

A copy of the Ultrasound Periodic Maintenance Inspection

Certificate should be kept in the same room or near the

Ultrasound system.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

10-13

Care and Maintenance

Quality assurance

In order to gain accreditation from organizations such as the

American College of Radiology (USA), it is the customer’s responsibility to have a quality assurance program in place for each Ultrasound system. The program must be directed by a medical physicists, the supervising radiologist/physician or appropriate designee.

Routine quality control testing must occur regularly. The same tests are performed during each period so that changes can be monitored over time and effective corrective action can be taken.

Testing results, corrective action and the effects of corrective action must be documented and maintained on the site.

Your GE service representative can help you with establishing, performing and maintaining records for a quality assurance program. Contact GE for coverage and/or price for service.

10-14 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Maintenance task schedule

Maintenance task schedule

How often should maintenance tasks be performed?

The Care and Maintenance task schedule (provided in

Table 10-3 on page 10-15 ) specifies how often your LOGIQ e should be serviced and outlines items requiring special attention.

NOTE: It is the customer’s responsibility to ensure the LOGIQ e care and maintenance is performed as scheduled in order to retain its high level of safety, dependability and performance.

Your GE Service Representative has an in-depth knowledge of your LOGIQ e and can best provide competent, efficient service.

Contact GE for coverage information and/or price for service.

The service procedures and recommended intervals shown in the Care and Maintenance Task Schedule assumes that you use your LOGIQ e for an average patient load (10-12 per day) and not use it as a primary mobile Ultrasound system which is transported between diagnostic facilities.

NOTE: If conditions exist which exceed typical usage and patient load, then it is recommended to increase the periodic maintenance frequencies.

Service at Indicated

Time

Clean Probes

Inspect AC Mains Cable

Table 10-3: Customer Care Schedule

Daily Weekly

•*

Monthly

Per

Facilities

QA

Program

•

Notes

* or before each use

Mobile Ultrasound system: Check

Weekly

Inspect Cables and

Connectors

Clean Console

Clean LCD

•

•

•

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

10-15

Care and Maintenance

Service at Indicated

Time

Console Leakage Current

Checks

Peripheral Leakage

Current Checks

Surface Probe Leakage

Current Checks

Endocavity Probe Leakage

Current Checks

Surgical Probe Leakage

Current Checks

Measurement Accuracy

Checks

Functional Checks

Table 10-3: Customer Care Schedule (Continued)

Daily Weekly Monthly

Per

Facilities

QA

Program

See Notes

See Notes

See Notes

See Notes

See Notes

See Notes

See Notes

Notes

Twice Annually

Twice Annually

Twice Annually

Quarterly Annually

Quarterly Annually

Twice Annually also after corrective maintenance

NOTE: The maintenance may require specialized equipment to complete.

NOTE: The periodic maintenances are not mandatory. The table above is for reference only.

10-16 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Tools required

Tools required

NOTE: For a list of required tools for servicing the LOGIQ e, refer to chapter 8.

Standard GE tool kit

Tool ID

9-45358

9-4078

9-44572

9-44579

9-44579

9-45385

9-45378

9-4518

9-4518

9-44776

9-44601

9-4151

9-41421

9-41594

9-41581

9-39451

The following is a description of the “Standard” GE tool kit in the

USA. Not all tools are required.

Table 10-4: Overview of GE-1 tool kit contents

Description

Pliers Retaining Ring

Scribe

Wrench Open End 3/8 - 7/16

Wrench Open End 1/2 - 9/16

Wrench Open End 1/2 - 9/16

Pliers, Arc Joint 7 inch

Pliers, Slip Joint

Pliers, Long Nose, Miniature

Pliers, Long Nose, Miniature

Ignition Wrench Set, 10 pc.

Wrench, Adj., 4 inch

Screwdriver, Blade, Stubby

Screwdriver, Blade, Pocket clip

Screwdriver, Blade 1/8 in. × 4 in.

Screwdriver, Blade 3/16 in. × 4 in.

20' Steel Tape, locking Spring load

Tool ID

9-XL9971MM

9-XL9972MM

9-XL9973MM

9-XL9974MM

9-XL9975MM

9-XL9976MM

9-XL9977MM

9-XL991CM

C2356E

BLBO

DWL4283T

9-41322

9-6757

9-9487

9-45341

9-3001

Description

Xcelite-hex Blade 1.27mm

Xcelite-hex Blade 1.5mm

Xcelite-hex Blade 2 mm

Xcelite-hex Blade 2.5mm

Xcelite-hex Blade 3mm

Xcelite-hex Blade 4mm

Xcelite-hex Blade 5mm

Handle

Screw starter - Kedman

Quick Wedge

Box - 18 Compartment

Box - 5 Compartment

Pickup Tool, Claw type

6 pc Needle File Set

Utility Knife

Pliers Vice Grip 10 inch

Xacto Pen Knife

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

10-17

Care and Maintenance

Tool ID

9-GH807

68-412

9-GH130

9-41584

9-4118

9-41293

9-41294

9-41295

9-46677

9-34701

9-43499

9-4355

9-43523

9-43531

9-65283

9-46696

9-39829

9-38461

9-4280

9-WEW60P3

9-WECT5B6

9-WEWDP12

93383

9-GH408

21576

Table 10-4: Overview of GE-1 tool kit contents (Continued)

Description

Ratchet, Offset, Slotted

Ratchet, Offset, Phillips

Tapered Reamer

Screwdriver, slotted 1/4 in. × 6 in.

Screwdriver, Phillips #2,

Stubby

Screwdriver, Phillips #0

Screwdriver, Phillips #1

Screwdriver, Phillips #2

Hex Keys, 20 pc., Metric

1/4 in. Standard Socket set (19 pc)

1/2 inch Socket 1/4 inch drive

Flex Spinner

Breaker

6 inch Ext.

Case 8.5 in. × 4.5 in. × 2 in.

Deep

Hex Keys

Tool ID

9-HT62002

9-4099

9-GH3001

9-GH300ME

9-XL9920

9-XL9921

9-XL9922

9-XL9923

9-XL9924

9-XL9925

9-XL9926

9-XL99764

9-XL99964

9-XLM60

9-45072

9-XL100X

Description

Solder Aid, Fork and Hook

Mirror, Round, Telescoping

Steel Rule Decimal 6 inch

Steel Rule Metric 6 inch

Xcelite-hex Blade.050 inch

Xcelite-hex Blade 1/16 inch

Xcelite-hex Blade 5/16 inch

Xcelite-hex Blade 3/32 inch

Xcelite-hex Blade 1/8 inch

Xcelite-hex Blade 5/32 inch

Xcelite-hex Blade 3/16 inch

Xcelite-hex Blade 7/64

Xcelite-hex Blade 9/64

Mini-screwdriver kit

Pliers 6 inch Diagonal

Torpedo Level, Magnetic

Hammer, Ball Peen, 4 oz.

Universal Joint 1/4 inch

Weller - Soldering Iron, 3 wire

Weller - Soldering Iron Tip

Weller - Desoldering Pump

Flashlight Mini-Mag Lite (AAA

Bat.)

Tweezers

Brush - Bristle

9-XL87CG

9-WEWDT-07

9-WS175-E

KH174

KH175

9-Z9480121

Wire Stripper/Cutter 5 inch -

100X

Pliers - very fine needle nose-87CG

Weller-Soldering-Replacem ent Tip(1)

Wiss - Surgical Scissors

Hemostat 5 inch Straight

Hemostat 5 inch curved

Alignment tool (red)

10-18 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Tool ID

9-45381

9-45092

9-42882

9-42884

9-42886

9-42973

9-GH77

9-GH890

9-31276

9-31277

9-31263

21045C

9-44604

9-41587

9-41586

9-GH19512

9-44741

Tools required

Tool ID

9-4516

Table 10-4: Overview of GE-1 tool kit contents (Continued)

Description

Pliers 4 1/4 inch Diagonal

Tool ID Description

GE-2 tool kit

Table 10-5: Overview of GE-2 tool kit contents

GE-2 Sears Kit (#99034)

Description Tool ID

Pliers, Arc Joint 9 1/2 inch 9-44067

Pliers, Linesman 8 1/2 inch

Punch, Pin 3/32 inch

Punch, Pin 5/32 inch

Punch, Pin 1/4 inch

Cold Chisel 1/2 inch

Center Punch Automatic

File Handle, Adj.

File, Round, Bastard 8 inch

File, Half Round, Bastard 8 inch

File, Flat Mill 8 inch

Close Quarter Saw

Wrench, Adj. 10 inch

Screwdriver 5/16 inch × 8 inch

Screwdriver, Stubby 5/16 inch

Countersink 1/2 inch

12 PC Combination Wrench

Set

9-42679

9-44262

9-4258

9-34374

9-44311

9-33485

9-33484

9-33484

9-52068

9-52722

9-52723

9-44046

Description

Socket 1 1/16 in. for 1/2 in. drive

Socket 10MM Hex for 1/2 in. drive (2273333)

Extension 10 inch for 1/2 in. drive (2273405)

3/8 inch to 1/2 inch Adapter

3/8 inch Metric Socket Set -

12 PT

16mm Socket 12 pt.

Metal Socket Tray

Metal Socket Tray

Metal Socket Tray

Tap and Drill Set

#6 Tap

#8 Tap

High Speed Drill Set

#36 Drill

#29 Drill

3/8 inch Socket Set

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

10-19

Care and Maintenance

Special tools, supplies and equipment used for maintenance

Table 10-6: Overview of tool requirements for periodic maintenance

Tool / kit

Digital Volt Meter (DVM)

Anti Static Kit

Comments

Anti Static Vacuum Cleaner

Safety Analyzer

QIQ Phantom

B/W Printer Cleaning Sheet

Color Printer Cleaning Sheet

Disposable Gloves

Kit includes anti–static mat, wrist strap and cables for 200 to 240V system

3M #2204 Large adjustable wrist strap

3M #2214 Small adjustable wrist strap

3M #3051 conductive ground cord

120V

230V

Electrical leakage testing may be accomplished with any calibrated

Electrical Safety Analyzer tool compliant with AAMI/ESI 1993 or

IEC 60601 or AS/NZS 3551.

RMI Grayscale Target Model 403GS

NOTE! The use of a Phantom is not required during Preventive

Maintenance. Customer may use it as part of their Quality

Assurance Program tests.

See printer user manual for requirements

See printer user manual for requirements

10-20 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

System maintenance

System maintenance

Contents in This Section

• ‘Preliminary checks’ on page 10-21

• ‘Functional checks’ on page 10-23

• ‘System checks’ on page 10-23

• ‘Peripheral/option checks’ on page 10-24

• ‘Mains cable inspection’ on page 10-24

• ‘Cleaning’ on page 10-25

• ‘Physical inspection’ on page 10-25

• ‘Optional Diagnostic Checks’ on page 10-26

• ‘Probe maintenance’ on page 10-27

• ‘Basic probe care’ on page 10-27

• ‘Basic probe cleaning’ on page 10-28

• ‘Battery Performance Maintenance’ on page 10-29

Preliminary checks

Step

1.

2.

3.

4.

Item

Ask and Listen

Paperwork

Power up

Probes

The preliminary checks take about 15 minutes to perform. Refer to the Ultrasound system user documentation whenever necessary.

Table 10-7: System preliminary checks

Description

Ask the customer if they have any problems or questions about the equipment.

Fill in the top of Ultrasound Inspection Certificate (see Figure 10-15 on

page 10-44

). Record all probes and Ultrasound system options.

• Turn the Ultrasound system power on and verify that all fans and peripherals turn on.

• Watch the displays during power up to verify that no warning or error messages are displayed.

• Where applicable, confirm that the battery is charged. If no AC Input present, use the internal battery.

Verify that the Ultrasound system properly recognizes all probes.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

10-21

Care and Maintenance

Table 10-7: System preliminary checks

Step Item Description

5.

6.

Displays

InSite

Verify proper display on the monitor.

Where applicable, for Warranty and Contract Customers only:

• Verify that InSite is functioning properly.

• Ensure two-way remote communications.

7. Review Error Logs Where applicable, Error Logs can be reviewed via system diagnostics.

8. Diagnostics Optional.

9.

10.

Presets

Image Archive

Backup all Customer Presets to an appropriate media.

Back up the Image Archive onto appropriate media.

10-22 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

System maintenance

Functional checks

NOTE: See also Chapter 4

The functional checks take about 60 minutes to perform. Refer to the Ultrasound system user documentation whenever necessary.

System checks

Table 10-8: System functional checks

Step

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Item

B-Mode

CF-Mode

Doppler Modes

M-Mode

Probe Elements

6. Applicable

Software Options

7. Xmit/Recv

Elements

Description

Verify basic B-Mode (2D) operation. Check the basic Ultrasound system controls that affect this mode of operation.

Verify basic CF-Mode (Color Flow Mode) operation. Check the basic

Ultrasound system controls that affect this mode of operation.

Verify basic Doppler operation (PW and CW if available). Check the basic

Ultrasound system controls that affect this mode of operation.

Verify basic M-Mode operation. Check the basic Ultrasound system controls that affect this mode of operation.

Perform an Element Test on each probe to verify that all the probe elements and system channels are functional.

Verify the basic operation of all optional modes such as Contrast. Check the basic Ultrasound system controls that affect each options operation.

Use the Visual Channel Utility on the loop connect to verify that all system xmit/recv channels are functional.

9.

10. test

Keyboard

LCD

Do the interactive keyboard test.

Verify basic LCD display functions. Refer to Chapter 3 of the User Manual.

Menu Verify Software Menu display functions. Refer to Chapter 3 of the User check

12. Peripherals

Manual.

See: .

13. Measurements In measurement mode, make distance measurement, get result in result window. Verify the distance by graduate rule. Distance Accuracy should be within

±5%. (Name result from result window Result A, result from graduate rule Result B; Distance Accuracy = (Result B-Result A)/Result A)

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

10-23

Care and Maintenance

Peripheral/option checks

5.

6.

7.

Step

1.

2.

3.

4.

If any peripherals or options are not part of the system configuration, the check can be omitted.

Refer to the User Manual for a list of approved peripherals/ options.

Table 10-9: GE approved peripheral/hardware option functional checks

Item

Media

B/W Printer

Color Printer

DICOM

ECG

Footswitch

DVD

Description

Verify media drive(s) read/write properlty. Clean if necessary.

Verify hardcopy output of the B/W video page printer. Clean heads and covers if necessary.

Verify hardcopy output of the Color video page printer. Clean heads and covers if necessary.

Verify that DICOM is functioning properly. Send an image to a DICOM device.

Verify basic operation with customer

Verify that the footswitch is functioning as programed. Clean as necessary.

Verify that the DVD is functioning properly. Clean heads and covers if necessary.

Mains cable inspection

Table 10-10: Mains Cable Inspection, As Appropriate

Step

1.

2.

3.

Item

Unplug Cord

Inspect

Verify

Description

Disconnect the mains cable from the wall and Ultrasound system.

Inspect it and its connectors for damage of any kinds.

Verify that the LINE, NEUTRAL and GROUND wires are properly attached to the terminals, and that no strands may cause a short circuit.

10-24 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

System maintenance

Cleaning

Step

1.

Item

Console

2.

3.

Probe Holder

LCD

Table 10-11: General Cleaning

Description

Remove the battery. Use a fluid detergent in warm water on a soft, damp cloth to carefully wipe the entire system. Be careful not to get the cloth too wet so that moisture does not enter the console.

Clean probe holders. (they may need to be soaked to remove excess gel).

Use a soft, non-abrasive folder cloth. Gently wipe the LCD face. DO NOT use a glass cleaner that has a hydrocarbon base (such as Benzene,

Methy Alcohol or Methy Ethyl Ketone) on LCD with the filter (anti-glare shield).

Physical inspection

Step

1.

2.

3.

6.

8.

NOTE: These features may not be present on all Ultrasound systems.

Table 10-12: Physical checks

Item Description

Labeling Verify that all Ultrasound system labeling is present and in readable condition.

Scratches & Dents Inspect the exterior for dents, scratches or cracks.

Input Power Refer to: ‘Mains cable inspection’ on page 10-24 .

Connectors

Covers

Check all internal cable harnesses and connectors for wear and secure connector seating. Pay special attention to footswitch assembly and probe strain or bend reliefs.

Check to ensure that all EMI shielding, internal covers, air flow panels and screws are in place. Missing covers and hardware could cause EMI/RFI problems while scanning.

Control Panel Inspect keyboard and control panel. Note any damaged or missing items.

Lighting

Panel Check for proper operation of all operator panel and Freeze Key light.

LCD Inspect the LCD Display for scratches and bad pixels.

Verify proper operation of Contrast and Brightness controls.

Where applicable, confirm that the LCD arm allows:

• swivelling the screen to the left and to the right

• folding the screen to the locked position

• release and adjustment backwards and forwards

• can be adjusted in the up/down positions.

Note: LCD Arm movement may vary and is not applicable to all Ultrasound systems.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

10-25

Care and Maintenance

Step

11.

Item

System Status

Indicators

Battery

Table 10-12: Physical checks (Continued)

Description

Check for proper operation of all Power and System Status Indicators.

Where applicable, check that the battery is not damaged, does not leak, does not emit an odor, and is not deformed or discolored. Observe all warnings and cautions for battery handling, recharging, storing, and/or disposal,

Optional Diagnostic Checks

Optionally you can access the diagnostic software as described in Chapter 5 or 7. View the error logs and run desired diagnostics.

View the Log

1. Review the system error log for any problems.

2. Check the temperature log to see if there are any trends that could cause problems in the future.

3. Check the Configuration Log; update if needed.

10-26 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

System maintenance

Probe maintenance

Probe related checks

Step

1.

2.

3.

Item

Probe Holder

Probes

Probes

Table 10-13: System preliminary checks

Description

Clean probe holders. (they may need to be soaked to remove excess gel).

Thoroughly check the Ultrasound system probe connectors and remove dust from inside the connector sockets if necessary. Visually check for bent, damaged or missing pins.

Verify that the Ultrasound system properly recognizes all probes.

Basic probe care

The Ultrasound system user manuals and various probe handling cards provide a complete description of probe care, maintenance, cleaning and disinfection. Ensure that you are completely familiar with the proper care of GE probes.

Ultrasound probes can be easily damaged by improper handling. See the User Manual and probe care cards for more details. Failure to follow these precautions can result in serious injury and equipment damage. Failure to properly handle or maintain a probe may also void its warranty.

Any evidence of wear indicates the probe cannot be used.

Do a visual check of the probe pins and Ultrasound system sockets before plugging in a probe.

The Interoperative probes often have special considerations and individual probe user manuals. For Interoperative probes also refer to their separate user manuals.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

10-27

Care and Maintenance

Basic probe cleaning

Refer to the User’s Manual for details on probe cleaning.

WARNING

To help protect yourself from blood borne diseases, wear approved disposable gloves. These are made of nitrile derived from vegetable starch to prevent allergic latex reactions.

CAUTION

CAUTION

Failure to follow the prescribed cleaning or disinfection procedures will void the probe’s warranty.

DO NOT soak or wipe the lens with any product not listed in the

User Manual. Doing so could result in irreparable damage to the probe.

Follow care instructions that came with the probe.

Disinfect a defective probe before you return it. Be sure to tag the probe as being disinfected.

10-28 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

System maintenance

Battery Performance Maintenance

Battery replacement every three years is recommended.

It is recommended to do battery performance maintenance one time per year.

Please follow the flow chart below to carry out battery performance maintenance.

Battery discharge

>45 minutes?

Yes

Battery charge > 3 hour

No

Battery charge > 3 hour

No

Replace battery

Battery power > 90%?

Yes

Battery is Ok

Battery power > 90%?

Yes

Discharge

No

Replace battery

>45 minutes?

Yes

No

Battery is Ok

Replace battery

Figure 10-10. Flow chart of Battery Performance Maintenance

NOTE: Disconnect all probes when discharge battery.

NOTE: Discharge the battery to let the system automatically shut down.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

10-29

Care and Maintenance

Electrical safety tests

Contents in This Section

• ‘Safety test overview’ on page 10-30

• ‘Leakage current limits’ on page 10-33

• ‘Outlet test - wiring arrangement’ on page 10-35

• ‘Grounding continuity’ on page 10-36

• ‘Chassis leakage current test’ on page 10-37

• ‘Data Sheet for enclosure Source Leakage Current’ on

page 10-38

• ‘Probe leakage current test’ on page 10-39

• ‘Definition’ on page 10-39

• ‘Tools’ on page 10-39

• ‘Generic procedure on probe leakage current’ on

page 10-40

• ‘Meter Procedure Using Probe Adapter’ on page 10-40

• ‘No Meter Procedure Using Probe Adapter’ on page 10-40

• ‘Data Sheet for Transducer Source Leakage Current’ on

page 10-41

Safety test overview

The electrical safety tests in this section are based on and conform to IEC 60601-1 Medical Equipment Safety Standards.

They are intended for the electrical safety evaluation of cord-connected, electrically operated, patient care equipment. If additional information is needed, refer to the IEC 60601-1 documents

10-30 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Electrical safety tests

WARNING

THE USER MUST ENSURE THAT THE SAFETY

INSPECTIONS ARE PERFORMED AT LEAST EVERY 6

MONTHS ACCORDING TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF

THE PATIENT SAFETY STANDARD IEC-EN 60601-1.

ONLY TRAINED PERSONS ARE ALLOWED TO

PERFORM THE SAFETY INSPECTIONS MENTIONED

ABOVE.

DANGER TO MINIMIZE RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK, ONLY

TRAINED PERSONS ARE ALLOWED TO PERFORM THE

ELECTRICAL SAFETY INSPECTIONS AND TESTS.

DANGER TO AVOID ELECTRICAL SHOCK, THE ULTRASOUND

SYSTEM UNDER TEST MUST NOT BE CONNECTED TO

OTHER ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. REMOVE ALL

INTERCONNECTING CABLES AND WIRES. THE

ULTRASOUND SYSTEM UNDER TEST MUST NOT BE

CONTACTED BY USERS OR PATIENTS WHILE

PERFORMING THESE TESTS.

CAUTION

Possible risk of infection. Do not handle soiled or contaminated probes and other components that have been in patient contact. Follow appropriate cleaning and disinfecting procedures before handling the equipment.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

10-31

Care and Maintenance

Safety test overview (continued)

Prior to initiating any electrical test, the Ultrasound system must be visually inspected. Perform the following visual checks:

• Check for missing or loose enclosure covers that could allow access to internal live parts.

• Examine the mains cord, mains plug and appliance inlet for damaged insulation and adequacy of strain relief and cable clamps.

• Locate and examine all associated transducers. Inspect the cables and strain relief at each end. Inspect the transducer enclosure and lens for cracks, holes and similar defects.

Test the system, peripherals and probes for leakage current.

Excessive leakage current can cause injury or death in sensitive patients. High leakage current can also indicate degradation of insulation and a potential for electrical failure. Do not use probes or equipment having excessive leakage current.

To minimize the risk that a probe may shock someone the customer should:

• Not use a probe that is cracked or damaged in any way.

• Check probe leakage current:

• Based on your facilities QA program for surface probes.

• Based on your facilities QA program for endocavitary probes.

• whenever probe damage is suspected.

10-32 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Electrical safety tests

Leakage current limits

WARNING

Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ e.

When servicing parts of the Ultrasound system where there is exposure to voltage greater than 30 volts:

1. Follow LOCK OUT/TAG OUT procedures.

2. Turn off the breaker.

3. Unplug the Ultrasound system.

4. Maintain control of the Ultrasound system power plug.

5. Wait for at least 30 seconds for capacitors to discharge as there are no test points to verify isolation.

Ultrasound System components may be energized.

CAUTION

Compare all safety-test results with safety-test results of previously performed safety tests (e.g. last year etc). In case of unexplainable abrupt changes of safety-test results consult experienced authorized service personnel or GE for further analysis.

The following limits are summarized for IEC 60601-1 Medical

Equipment Safety Standards. These limits are GEMS standards and in some cases are lower than the above standards listed.

Table 10-14: Chassis Leakage Current Limits - Accessible Metal Surface

Country

All (Except USA &

Canada)

USA & Canada

Normal

Condition

0.1 mA

0.1 mA

Open Ground

0.5 mA

0.3 mA

Reverse

Polarity

0.5 mA

0.3 mA

Open Neutral

0.5 mA

0.3 mA

All

Table 10-15: Type BF Applied Part Leakage Current Limits - Probes Surface

Country

Normal

Condition

0.1 mA

Open

Ground

0.5 mA

Reverse

Polarity

0.5 mA

Open

Neutral

0.5 mA

*Mains

Applied

5.0 mA

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

10-33

Care and Maintenance

Leakage current limits (continued)

All

Table 10-16: Type CF Applied Part Leakage Current Limits - ECG Connections

Country

Normal

Condition

0.1 mA

Open

Ground

0.5 mA

Reverse

Polarity

0.5 mA

Open

Neutral

0.5 mA

*Mains

Applied

5.0 mA

NOTE: *Mains Applied refers to the sink leakage test where mains

(supply) voltage is applied to the part to determine the amount of current that will pass (or sink) to ground if a patient contacted mains voltage.

The following tests are performed at the factory and should be performed at the site. These tests are: chassis leakage current, and probe leakage current. All measurements are made with an electrical safety analyzer which should be calibrated and compliant with AAMI/ESI 1993 or IEC 60601 or AS/NZS 3551.

Table 10-17: Equipment Type and Test Definitions

Applied

Parts

(AP)

Parts or accessories that contact the patient to perform their function. For ultrasound equipment, this includes transducers and ECG leads.

Type BF Body Floating or non-conductive ultrasound probes which are marked with the 'man in box' BF symbol. this includes all transducers.

Type CF Cardiac Floating or non-conductive intraoperative probes for direct cardiac contact and isolated ECG connections so marked with the 'heart in box' CF symbol.

Sink

Leakage

The current resulting from the application of mains voltage to the applied part. This test is required test for Type CF applied parts.

10-34 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Electrical safety tests

Outlet test - wiring arrangement

Test all outlets in the area for proper grounding and wiring arrangement by plugging in the neon outlet tester and noting the combination of lights that are illuminated. Any problems found should be reported to the hospital immediately and the receptacle should not be used.

CORRECT WIRING OPEN GROUND WIRE

REVERSED POLARITY OPEN NEUTRAL WIRE

HOT AND GROUND

REVERSED

OPEN HOT WIRE

Figure 10-11. Typical alternate outlet tester

NOTE: No outlet tester can detect the condition where the Neutral

(grounded supply) conductor and the Grounding (protective earth) conductor are reversed. If later tests indicate high leakage currents, this should be suspected as a possible cause and the outlet wiring should be visually inspected.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

10-35

Care and Maintenance

Grounding continuity

DANGER ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD. THE PATIENT MUST NOT BE

CONTACTED TO THE EQUIPMENT DURING THIS TEST.

Measure the resistance from the third pin of the attachment plug to the exposed metal parts of the case. The ground wire resistance should be less than 0.2 ohms. Reference the procedure in the IEC60601-1.

2. OHMMETER

4. ACCESSIBLE METAL PART:

• MONITOR HOUSING

• PEAR PANEL CONNECTOR

• ANY CASTER/WHEEL SUPPORT

Figure 10-12. Ground continuity test

10-36 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Electrical safety tests

Chassis leakage current test

DANGER ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD. WHEN THE METER'S

GROUND SWITCH IS OPEN, DON'T TOUCH THE

ULTRASOUND SYSTEM!.

CAUTION

Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity and the status of Neutral when the Ultrasound system is powered

ON. Be sure to turn the Ultrasound system power OFF before switching them using the POLARITY switch and/or the

NEUTRAL switch. Otherwise, the Ultrasound system may be damaged.

Generic procedure

The test verifies the isolation of the power line from the chassis.

The testing meter is connected from accessible metal parts of the case to ground. Measurements should be made with the unit

ON and OFF, with the power line polarity Normal and Reversed.

Record the highest reading of current.

Figure 10-13. Set Up for Chassis Source Leakage Current, IEC 601-1 Clause 19 -

Continuos Leakage Currents and Patient, Auxiliary Currents

When using the Microguard or a similar test instrument, its power plug may be inserted into the wall outlet and the equipment under test is plugged into the receptacle on the panel of the meter. This places the meter in the grounding conductor and the current flowing from the case to ground will be indicated in any of the current ranges. The maximum allowable limit for chassis source leakage is shown in Table 10-14 on page 10-33 .

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

10-37

Care and Maintenance

Data Sheet for enclosure Source Leakage Current

The test passes when all readings measure less than the value shown in Table 10-14 on page 10-33 . Record all data on the PM

Inspection Certificate.

Table 10-18: Typical Data Sheet for enclosure Source Leakage Current

Unit

Power

Tester

Polarity

Switch

Tester

Neutral or

Ground

Switch

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

Enter Name of tested peripheral here:

ON NORM OPEN

ON

ON

NORM

REV

CLOSED

OPEN

REV

NORM

NORM

REV

REV

CLOSED

OPEN

CLOSED

OPEN

CLOSED

Test 1

Speaker

Cover

Test 2 Real

Panel Metal

Parts

Optional

Test 3

Optional

Test 4

10-38 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Electrical safety tests

Probe leakage current test

DANGER

CAUTION

DO NOT USE THE PROBE IF THE INSULATING MATERIAL

HAS BEEN PUNCTURED OR OTHERWISE COMPROMISED.

INTEGRITY OF THE INSULATION MATERIAL AND PATIENT

SAFETY CAN BE VERIFIED BY SAFETY TESTING

ACCORDING TO IEC60601-1.

Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity and the status of Neutral when the Ultrasound system is powered

ON. Be sure to turn the Ultrasound system power OFF before switching them using the POLARITY switch and/or the

NEUTRAL switch. Otherwise, the Ultrasound system may be damaged.

Definition

This test measures the current that would flow to ground from any of the probes through a patient who is being scanned and becomes grounded by touching some other grounded surface.

NOTE: Some leakage current is expected on each probe, depending on its design. Small variations in probe leakage currents are normal from probe to probe. Other variations will result from differences in line voltage and test lead placement. It is abnormal if no leakage current is measured. If no leakage current is detected, check the configuration of the test equipment.

Tools

For needed tools, see: ‘Tools required’ on page 10-17 .

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

10-39

Care and Maintenance

Generic procedure on probe leakage current

H (BLACK)

Measurements should be made with the ground open and closed, with power line polarity normal and reversed, and with the unit Off and On. For each combination, the probe must be active to find the worst case condition.

POLARITY REVERSING SWITCH

PROBE

CONSOLE

N (WHITE)

POWER

OUTLET

G (GREEN)

MOMENTARY

SWITCH

LEAKAGE TEST

METER

Figure 10-14. Set up for probe leakage current

NOTE: Each probe will have some amount of leakage current, dependent on its design. Small variations in probe leakage currents are normal from probe to probe. Other variations will result from differences in line voltage and test lead placement.

DANGER TO AVOID PROBE DAMAGE AND POSSIBLE ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT IMMERSE PROBES INTO ANY LIQUID

BEYOND THE LEVEL INDICATED IN THE PROBE USERS

MANUAL. DO NOT TOUCH THE PROBE, CONDUCTIVE

LIQUID OR ANY PART OF THE UNIT UNDER TEST WHILE

DOING THE TEST.

Meter Procedure Using Probe Adapter

Follow the Safety Analyzer tool instruction to test each transducer for leakage current.

The electrical Safety Analyzer tool should be calibrated and compliant with AAMI/ESI 1993 or IEC 60601 or AS/NZS 3551.

No Meter Procedure Using Probe Adapter

Follow the Safety Analyzer tool instruction to test each transducer for leakage current.

The electrical Safety Analyzer tool should be calibrated and compliant with AAMI/ESI 1993 or IEC 60601 or AS/NZS 3551.

10-40 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Electrical safety tests

Data Sheet for Transducer Source Leakage Current

Unit Power

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

The test passes when all readings measure less than the values shown in Table 10-15 on page 10-33 . Record all data on the PM

Inspection Certificate.

Table 10-19: Typical Data Sheet For Transducer Source Leakage Current

Transducer Tested:

Tester Power Polarity

Switch

Tester GROUND or

NUETRAL Switch

NORM

NORM

REV

REV

NORM

NORM

REV

REV

OPEN

CLOSED

OPEN

CLOSED

OPEN

CLOSED

OPEN

CLOSED

Measurement

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

10-41

Care and Maintenance

When there's too much leakage current …

AC/DC Fails

Where applicable, check the AC/DC adapter and its cable.

Replace a new one if any portion is defective.

Chassis Fails

Check the ground on the power cord and plug for continuity.

Ensure the ground is not broken, frayed, or intermittent. Replace any defective part.

Where applicable, tighten all grounds. Ensure star washers are under all ground studs.

Inspect wiring for bad crimps, poor connections, or damage.

Test the wall outlet; verify it is grounded and is free of other wiring abnormalities. Notify the user or owner to correct any deviations. As a work around, check the other outlets to see if they could be used instead.

NOTE: No outlet tester can detect the condition where the white neutral wire and the green grounding wire are reversed. If later tests indicate high leakage currents, this should be suspected as a possible cause and the outlet wiring should be visually inspected.

10-42 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

When there's too much leakage current …

Probe Fails

Test the probe in another connector to isolate if the fault lies with the probe or the Ultrasound system. Or Change another probe to confirm if the fail is caused by console.

NOTE: Each probe will have some amount of leakage, dependent on its design. Small variations in probe leakage currents are normal from probe to probe. Other variations will result from differences in line voltage and test lead placement. The maximum allowable leakage current for body surface contact probe differs from inter-cavity probe. Be sure to enter the correct probe type in the appropriate space on the check list.

If excessive leakage current is slot dependent, inspect the system connector for bent pins, poor connections, and ground continuity.

If the problem remains with the probe, replace the probe.

Peripheral Fails

Tighten all grounds. Ensure star washers are under all ground studs.

Inspect wiring for bad crimps, poor connections, or damage.

Still Fails

If all else fails, begin isolation by removing the probes, external peripherals, then the on board ones, one at a time while monitoring the leakage current measurement.

New Unit

If the leakage current measurement tests fail on a new

Ultrasound system and if situation can not be corrected, submit a Safety Failure Report to document the Ultrasound system problem. Remove Ultrasound system from operation.

ECG Fails

Inspect cables for damage or poor connections.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

10-43

Care and Maintenance

Inspection Paperwork

Ultrasound Inspection Forms

ULTRASOUND INSPECTION CERTIFICATE

C u s t o m e r N a m e : S y s t e m I D :

System Type

P r o b e 1 :

P r o b e 2 :

P r o b e 3 :

P r o b e 4 :

P r o b e 5 :

F r e q u e n c y :

F r e q u e n c y :

F r e q u e n c y :

F r e q u e n c y :

F r e q u e n c y :

M o d e l N u m b e r :

S c a n F o r m a t * :

S c a n F o r m a t * :

S c a n F o r m a t * :

S c a n F o r m a t * :

S c a n F o r m a t * :

D i s p a t c h N u m b e r / Date Performed:

S e r i a l N u m b e r :

M o d e l N u m b e r :

M o d e l N u m b e r :

M o d e l N u m b e r :

M o d e l N u m b e r :

M o d e l N u m b e r :

Warranty/C ontract/HBS

M a n u f a c t u r e D a t e :

S e r i a l N u m b e r :

S e r i a l N u m b e r :

S e r i a l N u m b e r :

S e r i a l N u m b e r :

S e r i a l N u m b e r :

* Scan Format: Phased Array, Linear Array, Curved Array, Mechanical Array or Other

Figure 10-15. Ultrasound Inspection Certificate

* Scan Format: Phased Array, Linear Array, Curved Array,

Mechanical Array or Other

10-44 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Inspection Paperwork

Ultrasound Inspection Forms (continued)

FUNCTIONAL CHECKS

Functional Check (if applicable)

B M o d e F u n c t i o n

D o p p l e r M o d e s F u n c t i o n

C F M o d e F u n c t i o n

M M o d e F u n c t i o n

Applicable Software Opti o n s

A p p il c a b l e H a r d w a r e O p t i o n s

Control Panel

LCD

Measurement Accuracy

GE Approved Peripherals

OK? or

N/A

PHYSICAL IN SPECTION AND CLEANING

Physical Inspection and Cleaning

(if applicable)

C o n s o l e

L C D

E x t e r n a l I / O

C a b l e s a n d C o n n e c t o r s

G E A p p r o v e d P e r i p h e r a l s (DVD-RW, Printer)

L a b e il ng (see User Manual for Labeling)

Inspect Clean

COMMENTS:

_________________________ ____________________________ _________________________

_________________________ ____________________________ _________________________

_________________________ ____________________________ _________________________

_________________________ ____________________________ _________________________

Figure 10-16. Functional Checks

ELECTRICAL SAFETY

Electrical Test Performed

Outlet (correct ground &wiring config.)

Type BF Applied Part Leakage Current

Limits- Probe enclosure Source Leakage Current -

Chassis Leakage Current Limits

Peripheral 1 Leakage Current

Peripheral 2 Leakage Current

Max Value

Allowed

Value

Measured OK?

Comments

PROBES

Probe Number

(from previous page)

Probe 1:

Probe 2:

Max Value

Allowed

Max Value

Measured OK?

Comments

Probe 3:

Final Check. All system covers are in place. System scans with all probes as expected.

Accepted by: ______________________________________________________________________

Figure 10-17. Electrical Safety

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

10-45

Care and Maintenance

Electrical Safety Tests Log

Electrical test performed

Outlet (correct ground and wiring config.)

System ground continuity

Chassis source leakage current - probe

Chassis source leakage current - wheel

Chassis source leakage current - monitor

Patient lead source leakage (lead to ground)

Patient lead source leakage (lead to lead)

Patient lead source leakage (isolation)

Peripheral 1 leakage current

Peripheral 1 ground continuity

Peripheral 2 leakage current

Table 10-20: Electrical safety tests log

Max value allowed

Value measured

OK?

Comments

10-46 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Electrical Safety Tests Log

Electrical test performed

Table 10-20: Electrical safety tests log (Continued)

Max value allowed

Value measured

OK?

Comments

Peripheral 2 ground continuity

Peripheral 3 leakage current

Peripheral 3 ground continuity

Probe

Table 10-21: Electrical safety tests (probes) log

Max value allowed

Max value measured

OK?

Comments

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

10-47

Care and Maintenance

10-48 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Chapter 11

Docking Cart Setup

This chapter describe the docking cart and give information on how to set up and use it, the concepts, functional test, troubleshooting of the docking cart.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

11-1

Docking Cart Setup

Overview

Contents in this chapter

• ‘Overview’ on page 11-2

• ‘Set Up Docking Cart’ on page 11-4

• ‘Cart Using’ on page 11-39

• ‘Docking Cart Functions (Theory)’ on page 11-43

• ‘Diagnostics/Troubleshooting’ on page 11-45

Introduction

This chapter contains this information:

•

• How to setup Docking Cart. Included are references to a procedure that describes how to receive and unpack the equipment and how to file a damage or loss claim.

How to prepare the facility and unit of the actual setup, and how to check and test the unit and external peripherals for electrical safety are included in this procedure. Also included in this section are guidelines for transporting the unit to a new site.

• The procedures for mounting the system to LOGIQ e and releasing the system from Docking Cart.

• Explain the Docking Cart’s concepts, component arrangement, and subsystem function.

• Describes how to test and adjust the functions. These tests are optional. You may use them to check the system for errors.

• Describes how to setup and run the tools that help Docking

Cart operation. Cart and board level diagnostics are run whenever power is applied. Some Service Tools may be run at the application level.

11-2 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Overview

Safety Consideration

NOTE: Please refer to Chapter 1 and Chapter 2 for the safety information and site requirement for the Docking Cart. Chapter 1 and Chapter 2 should be read before conducting any installation work on Docking Cart.

CAUTION

The Docking Cart weighs 59 kg (130.1 lb.) or more, depending on installed peripherals, when ready for use. Care must be used when moving it or replacing its parts.

Failure to follow the precautions listed below could result in injury, uncontrolled motion and costly damage.

ALWAYS:

• be sure the pathway is clear

• use slow, careful motions

• Limit movement to a slow careful walk.

• use two people when moving on inclines or lifting more than 16 kg (35 lbs)

WARNING

When the docking cart is raised for a repair or moved along any incline, use external caution since it may become unstable and tip over.

CAUTION

Do not move Docking Cart with big incline angle.

Do

CAUTION

CAUTION

The Docking Cart is not water proof. Do not expose the

Docking Cart to water or any kind of liquid.

Never set liquids on the Docking Cart to ensure that liquid does not drip into the unit.

Put peripherals in correct position to avoid Docking Cart overload.

NOTE: Special care should be taken when transporting the Docking

Cart in a vehicle.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

11-3

Docking Cart Setup

Set Up Docking Cart

Contents in This Section

• ‘Setup Reminders’ on page 11-5

• ‘Average Setup Time’ on page 11-5

• ‘Setup Warnings’ on page 11-5

• ‘Safety Reminders’ on page 11-7

• ‘Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment’ on page 11-8

• ‘Unpacking Docking Cart’ on page 11-8

• ‘Moving into Position’ on page 11-11

• ‘Product Locator Installation Card’ on page 11-11

• ‘Preparing for Installation’ on page 11-12

• ‘Verify Customer Order’ on page 11-12

• ‘Electrical Specifications’ on page 11-12

• ‘EMI Protection’ on page 11-12

• ‘Physical Dimension and Weight’ on page 11-13

• ‘Peripheral Installation’ on page 11-14

• ‘On-Board Optional Peripherals’ on page 11-14

• ‘Connect USB Printer to Docking Cart’ on page 11-14

• ‘Connect DVD-RW to Docking Cart’ on page 11-19

• ‘Connect ECG to Docking Cart’ on page 11-22

• ‘Options Installation’ on page 11-24

• ‘Install Extended Life Battery to Docking Cart’ on page 11-24

• ‘Install 3-Probe Port to Docking Cart’ on page 11-28

• ‘Install Color Printer Shelf to Docking Cart’ on page 11-32

• ‘Top Support DVD/Print Shelf Assy’ on page 11-34

• ‘Paperwork’ on page 11-38

• ‘Product Locator Installation’ on page 11-38

• ‘User Manual’ on page 11-38

11-4 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Set Up Docking Cart

Setup Reminders

Average Setup Time

Description

Unpacking the cart

Cart options

Table 11-1: Average Installation Time

Average Setup Time

0.5 hour

0.5 hour

Comments

Dependant on the configuration that is required

The Docking Cart has been designed to be setup and checked out by an experienced service technician in approximately four hours. Docking Cart consoles with optional equipment may take slightly longer.

Setup Warnings

NOTE:

• Since the Docking Cart weighs approximately 53 kg.(116 lb) without options, preferably two people should unpack it.

Two people are also preferable for setting up any additional bulky items.

• There are no operator serviceable components. To prevent shock, do not remove any covers or panels. Should problems or malfunctions occur, unplug the power cord.

Only qualified service personnel should carry out servicing and troubleshooting.

For information regarding packing labels, refer to LABELS

ON PACKAGE.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

11-5

Docking Cart Setup

Setup Warnings (continued)

• After being transported, the unit may be very cold or hot. If this is the case, allow the unit to acclimate before you turn it on. It requires one hour for each 2.5

°C increment it's temperature is below 10 °C or above 30°C.

CAUTION

Equipment damage possibility. Turning the system on without acclimation after arriving at site may cause the system to be damaged.

°C

°F hrs

60

140

8

55

131

6

50

122

4

Table 11-2: Acclimation Time

45

113

2

40

104

0

35

95

0

30

86

0

25

77

0

20

68

0

15

59

0

10

50

0

°C

°F hrs

5

41

2

0

32

4

-5

23

6

-10

14

8

-15

5

10

-20

-4

12

-25

-13

14

-30

-22

16

-35

-31

18

-40

-40

20

11-6 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Set Up Docking Cart

Safety Reminders

DANGER

WHEN USING ANY TEST INSTRUMENT THAT IS CAPABLE

OF OPENING THE AC GROUND LINE (I.E., METER’S

GROUND SWITCH IS OPEN), DON’T TOUCH THE UNIT!

CAUTION

Two people should unpack the unit because of its weight. Two people are required whenever a part weighing 19kg (42 lb.) or more must be lifted.

CAUTION

If the unit is very cold or hot, do not turn on its power until it has had a chance to acclimate to its operating environment.

CAUTION

To prevent electrical shock, connect the unit to a properly grounded power outlet. Do not use a three to two prong adapter. This defeats safety grounding.

CAUTION

CAUTION

Do not use a 20 Amp to 15 Amp adapter on the 120 Vac unit’s power cord. This unit requires a dedicated 20 A circuit and can have a 15A plug if the on board peripherals do not cause the unit to draw more than 14.0 amps.

Do not operate this unit unless all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. System performance and cooling require this.

CAUTION

OPERATOR MANUAL(S)

The User Manual(s) should be fully read and understood before operating the Docking Cart and kept near the unit for quick reference.

Figure 11-1. Environmental Labels

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

11-7

Docking Cart Setup

Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment

When a new Docking Cart arrives, check that any components are not damaged and are not in short supply. If shipping damage or shortage occurs, contact the address shown in

Chapter 1.

CAUTION

The crate with the Docking Cart weighs approximately 59 kg.

Be prepared for a sudden shift of weight as the unit is removed from its base (pallet).

Unpacking Docking Cart

No.

1.

Table 11-3: Procedure to take out Docking Cart

Steps

Cut off the two packing strap

(1-2) and remove them.

Then remove the two reinforce cardboards and remove the top cover.

Corresponding Graphic

2. Rotate the knob counterclockwise until it is loose and remove it.

11-8 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

No.

3.

Set Up Docking Cart

Table 11-3: Procedure to take out Docking Cart

Steps

Remove the ring from the carton.

Corresponding Graphic

4. Open the carton and remove it.

Remove the PE bag from the top.

5. Remove the top foam.

Remove the plastic film and the bottom foam from the

Docking Cart.

6. Cut off the reinforce strap and remove the pads on the four castors.

Two people lift up the docking cart and move it off the platform.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

11-9

Docking Cart Setup

Unpacking Docking Cart (continued)

11-10

Figure 11-2. Remove Foam

1. Lateral

3. Platform

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Set Up Docking Cart

Moving into Position

CAUTION

Do not tilt the unit more than 5 degrees to avoid tipping it over.

In general, a single adult can move the LOGIQ e along an even surface with no steep grades. At least two people should move the machine when large humps, grooves, or grades will be encountered. (It is better to pull from the rear rather than push from the front of the unit). Before moving, store all loose parts in the unit. Wrap transducers in soft cloth or foam to prevent damage.

LOGIQ e is a compact and mobile machine, two people should move it over rough surfaces or up and down grades.

Product Locator Installation Card

NOTE: The Product Locator Installation Card shown in this manual may not be same as the provided Product Locator card.

Figure 11-3. Product Locator Installation Card

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

11-11

Docking Cart Setup

Preparing for Installation

Verify Customer Order

Compare items received by the customer to that which is listed on the delivery order. Report any items that are missing, back ordered or damaged.

Electrical Specifications

Verify that Docking Cart is set to the correct voltage.

The Voltage settings for the Docking Cart is found on a label to the left of the Power switch and External I/O, on the rear of the system.

CAUTION

Connecting a Docking Cart to the wrong voltage level will most likely destroy it.

PARAMETER

Voltage Range

Power

Line Frequency

Power Transients

Table 11-4: Electrical requirements for Docking Cart

Decaying Oscillation

AREA

100-240V~

All applications

All applications

All applications

All applications

LIMITS

350VA

More than or equal to 750 VA

50/60Hz ( ±2Hz)

Less than 25% of nominal peak voltage for less than 1 millisecond for any type of transient, including line frequency, synchronous, asynchronous, or aperiodic transients.

Less than 15% of peak voltage for less than 1 millisecond.

EMI Protection

This Unit has been designed to minimize the effects of Electro

Magnetic Interference (EMI). Many of the covers, shields, and screws are provided primarily to protect the system from image artifacts caused by this interference. For this reason, it is imperative that all covers and hardware are installed and secured before the unit is put into operation.

11-12 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Set Up Docking Cart

Physical Dimension and Weight

Tall

Tall

Short

Short

The physical dimension of the Docking Cart is summarized in

Table 11-5 on page 11-13 including the size of Docking Cart, 3 probe ports and speakers.

Table 11-5: Physical Dimensions of Docking Cart

950

31.2

810

37

Height

470

15.4

470

15.4

Width

617

240.2

617

240.2

Depth

mm inch mm inch

Unit

The weight of Docking Cart is 59 kg (130.1 lbs) with 3 probe ports.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Figure 11-4. Overall Dimensions

11-13

Docking Cart Setup

Peripheral Installation

On-Board Optional Peripherals

Device

B/W Printer

Color Printer

DVD-RW

ECG

Table 11-6: Peripherals Validate for Docking Cart

Manufacturer

SONY

Model

UP-D897MD

Interface

USB Interface

SONY

SONY

LITEON

NORAV GE

UP-D898MD

UP-D25MD

LITEON eUAU108 USB Interface

ECGUSB1D-EX

USB Interface

USB Interface

USB Interface

Video Signal

N/A (* USB

Interface)

N/A (* USB

Interface)

N/A (* USB

Interface)

N/A (* USB

Interface)

N/A (* USB

Interface)

See each option setup instructions for installation and connection procedures.

Connect USB Printer to Docking Cart

Tools

• Common Allen Screwdriver

Needed Manpower

Preparations

• Shut down the system and switch off the main breaker

11-14 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Set Up Docking Cart

Connect USB Printer to Docking Cart (continued)

Mounting Procedure

Table 11-7: Mounting Procedure of B/W USB Printer

No.

1.

Step

Remove the rear panel from

Docking Cart.

Place the DC/AC adapter in the cabinet of Docking Cart. Let the cable of DC/AC adapter come out from the back of Docking Cart.

Note: The printer DC/AC adapter

is optional. It is ordered separately.

Corresponding Graphic

2. Connect the power cable from the

Docking Cart to the DC/AC adapter.

Note: When connecting the power cable to DC/AC adapter, align the embossing on the power cable connector with the groove on the

DC/AC adapter connector port edge. Then push the cable connector into the port.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

11-15

Docking Cart Setup

No.

3.

Table 11-7: Mounting Procedure of B/W USB Printer

Step

Connect the DC/AC cable to the printer (3). Connect USB cable to the printer (1) and to the USB HUB

(2). Then install the rear panel of

Docking Cart

.

Corresponding Graphic

Table 11-8: Mounting Procedure of B/W USB Printer on Top Support DVD/Print Shelf

No.

1.

2.

3.

Step

Be sure Top DVD/Print Shelf has been installed.

See ‘Top Support DVD/Print Shelf

Assy’ on page 11-34 for more

information.

Place the DC/AC adapter in the cabinet of Docking Cart. Let the cable of DC/AC adapter come out from the back of Docking Cart.

Refer to Table 11-7 on page 11-15 for this information.

Connect the power cable from the

Docking Cart to the DC/AC adapter. Refer to Table 11-7 on

page 11-15

for the information

Connect USB Cable and Power

Cable of DC/AC adapter to the printer and let the cables go down through Monitor Support Space.

Corresponding Graphic

11-16 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Set Up Docking Cart

Table 11-8: Mounting Procedure of B/W USB Printer on Top Support DVD/Print Shelf

No.

4.

Step

Connect the USB Cable to the

USB HUB.

Corresponding Graphic

5. Connect the power cable from the

Docking Cart to the DC/AC adapter. See Table 11-7 on

page 11-15

for more information.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

11-17

Docking Cart Setup

Removal Procedure

Remove the new parts in the reverse order of installation.

NOTE: When disconnecting the power cable from the DC/AC adapter, grab the handle of the cable with fingers and pull the cable.

Figure 11-5. Disconnect Power Cable

11-18 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Set Up Docking Cart

Connect DVD-RW to Docking Cart

Tools

• NA

Needed Manpower

Preparations

• Shut down the system and switch off the main breaker.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

11-19

Docking Cart Setup

Connect DVD-RW to Docking Cart (continued)

Mounting Procedure

Table 11-9: Mounting Procedure of DVD-RW

No.

1.

Step

Connect the USB Y Cable to the DVD-RW.

Corresponding Graphic

2. Unscrew the 4 screws to remove the real panel.

3. Place the DVD-RW on the DVD-RW shelf and let the USB Y cable come out from the back of the docking cart.

11-20 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

No.

4.

Set Up Docking Cart

Table 11-9: Mounting Procedure of DVD-RW

Step

Connect the two USB Connectors on the USB Y cable to the USB ports on the docking cart.

Note: Be sure the two connectors on the USB Y cable are connected to the USB ports on the

Docking Cart at the same time.

Corresponding Graphic

5. Mount the rear panel to the docking cart and tighten the 4 screws.

No.

1.

2.

Table 11-10: Mounting Procedure of DVD-RW to Top support DVD/print shelf

Step

Be sure Top DVD/Print Shelf has been installed.

See ‘Top Support DVD/Print Shelf Assy’ on

page 11-34 for more information.

Place the DVD-RW on the TOP DVD Shelf and connect the USB cable to the USB HUB.

Refer to Table 11-9 on page 11-20 for the information.

Corresponding Graphic

Removal Procedure

Remove the new parts in the reverse order of installation.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

11-21

Docking Cart Setup

Connect ECG to Docking Cart

Tools

• No special tools needed

Needed Manpower

Preparations

• Shut down the system and switch off the main breaker.

Mounting Procedure

No.

Table 11-11: Mounting Procedure of ECG

Step Corresponding Graphic

2. Put ECG in the ECG bracket.

3. Connect the ECG to the USB port on the

Docking Cart.

11-22 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Set Up Docking Cart

Connect ECG to Docking Cart (continued)

NOTE: If the ECG is not in use, hang the cable in the ECG cable hook.

Figure 11-6. Hang the cable

Removal Procedure

Remove the new parts in the reverse order of installation.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

11-23

Docking Cart Setup

Options Installation

Install Extended Life Battery to Docking Cart

NOTE: Before installing the Extended Life Battery, switch off the circuit breaker on the power box to power off the Docking Cart

Mounting Procedure

CAUTION

Use caution to avoid injuring hands when installing the

Extended Life Battery.

1.

No.

Table 11-12: Mounting Procedure of Extended Life Battery

Step

Flip down the 2 cover latches on the battery cover.

Corresponding Graphic

11-24 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

2.

No.

Set Up Docking Cart

Table 11-12: Mounting Procedure of Extended Life Battery

Step

Remove the battery cover.

Corresponding Graphic

3. Insert the Battery into the power box.

4. Push the battery into the power box.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

11-25

Docking Cart Setup

5.

No.

Table 11-12: Mounting Procedure of Extended Life Battery

Step

Flip up the 2 latches on the battery.

Corresponding Graphic

6. Try pulling the battery to check if the battery is fixed in the power box.

• If the battery can not be pulled out, it means the battery is well installed.

• If the battery can be pulled out, it means the battery is not well installed.

Reinstall the battery until it can not be pulled out from power box.

Removal Procedure

Remove the new parts in the reverse order of installation. See

‘Extended Life Battery (Part No. 5486499)’ on page 12-9 for

more information.

11-26 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Extended Life Battery Diagram

Set Up Docking Cart

Figure 11-7. Diagram

Extended Life Battery Usage

Review the Extended Life Battery User Instruction (5494921) that is packed with the Extended Life Battery. Please be sure to use the latest revision of the document.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

11-27

Docking Cart Setup

Install 3-Probe Port to Docking Cart

1. Pull out the lock on the 3-Probe Port bracket and rotate the lock 90° clockwise. Refer to picture 1.

NOTE:

Figure 11-8.

2. Do not slant the 3-Probe Port and hold it with both hands.

Aligning the two hooks on the 3-Probe Port with the two holes at the Docking Cart bottom, mount the 3-Probe Port to the Docking Cart. Refer to picture 2.

Be sure that the 3-Probe Port is not slanted when mounting it to the

Docking Cart.

Figure 11-9.

11-28 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Set Up Docking Cart

Install 3-Probe Port to Docking Cart (continued)

3. While holding the 3-Probe Port with both hands, install it by aligning the two attachment pins (1-2) with the two slots on the bracket, then push up the 3-Probe Port. The two attachment pins on 3-Probe Ports move up along the two slots on the bracket. Refer to picture 3.

Figure 11-10.

4. Make sure the 3-Probe Port is not slanted, then push it to the right. The two attachment pins (1-2) on the 3-Probe Port are clamped on the bracket. The hook (3) on the 3-Probe

Port and the hook on the bracket are interlocked. Refer to picture 4.

Figure 11-11.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

11-29

Docking Cart Setup

Install 3-Probe Port to Docking Cart (continued)

5. Rotate the lock 90° counterclockwise and release your hand, the lock automatically springs in the lock position.

Refer to picture 5.

Figure 11-12.

6. Mount the probe connector to the Docking Cart. Refer to picture 6.

Figure 11-13.

11-30 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Set Up Docking Cart

Install 3-Probe Port to Docking Cart (continued)

7. Stick 3-Probe Port label on Docking Cart.

Take out the label which is provided with 3-Probe Port in the

Kit. Remove the backing tape on the label. Stick it at this location on the top cover of Docking Cart. See picture 7.

Figure 11-14.

Removal Procedure

Remove the new parts in the reverse order of installation. See

‘3-Probe Port Assy (Part No. 5423182-2)’ on page 12-5 for more

information.

3-Probe Port Usage

Review the 3-Probe Port User Instruction (5494922) that is packed with the 3-Probe Port. Please be sure to use the latest revision of the document.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

11-31

Docking Cart Setup

Install Color Printer Shelf to Docking Cart

Tools

• Common Phillips screwdrivers

Preparation

No.

1.

2.

3.

• Shut down the system and switch off the main breaker.

Table 11-13: Mounting Procedure for Color Printer Shelf Assy

Steps

Remove the rear panel. See ‘Rear

Panel Assy (Part No. 5422978)’ on

page 12-8 for more information.

Remove the storage rack. See ‘Storage

Rack (Part No. 5219976-2)’ on

page 12-7 for more information.

Remove the 3 screw pads and unscrew the 3 screws on the cabinet top cover.

Corresponding Graphic

4. Unscrew the 2 screws at the back of the cabinet.

11-32 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

No.

5.

Set Up Docking Cart

Table 11-13: Mounting Procedure for Color Printer Shelf Assy

Steps

Slightly lift up the cabinet top cover with one hand and pull out the DVD and B/W printer shelf with another hand from the front of the Docking Cart.

Corresponding Graphic

6. Place the color printer shelf in to the cabinet from the front of Docking Cart.

7. Install the 8 screws to fix the shelf on

Docking Cart.

8. Fix the cabinet top cover and Install the

Rear Panel.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

11-33

Docking Cart Setup

Top Support DVD/Print Shelf Assy

Tools

• Common Hex driver

Needed Manpower

Preparations

• Turn off all the power supply.

11-34 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Set Up Docking Cart

Mounting Procedure

Table 11-14: Mounting Procedure of Top Support DVD/Printer Shelf Assy

No.

1.

2.

3.

Step

Remove the rear panel. See ‘Rear Panel

Assy (Part No. 5422978)’ on page 12-8 for

more information.

Remove Storage Rack. See ‘Storage Rack

(Part No. 5219976-2)’ on page 12-7 for more

information.

Remove the cover of the Monitor Support

Space Cap.

Corresponding Graphic

4. Turn over the Top DVD/Print Shelf. Turn over

B/W Printer and push it into the Top DVD/

Print Shelf.

5. Put the Support DVD/Print Shelf above the

Top DVD/Print Shelf with the roll upwards.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

11-35

Docking Cart Setup

No.

6.

Table 11-14: Mounting Procedure of Top Support DVD/Printer Shelf Assy

Step

Align the four screws holes to make sure the screw holes in B/W Printer and two shelves should superpose. Screw 4 screws. When screwing, slightly lift up the printer with hands to make the printer close to Top DVD/Print

Shelf.

Corresponding Graphic

7. Place the Top DVD/Printer shelf on the top of the cabinet and install it with the Support

Shelf snapped to the top of the cabinet.

8. Screw the 2 screws.

9. Screw the 2 screws.

11-36 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Set Up Docking Cart

No.

10.

Table 11-14: Mounting Procedure of Top Support DVD/Printer Shelf Assy

Step

Install the rear panel.

Corresponding Graphic

Removal Procedure

Remove the new parts in the reverse order of installation.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

11-37

Docking Cart Setup

Paperwork

NOTE: During and after setup, the documentation (i.e. User Manuals...) for the peripheral units must be kept as part of the original system documentation. This will ensure that all relevant safety and user information is available during the operation and service of the complete system.

Product Locator Installation

User Manual

Check that the correct User Manual(s) for the Docking Cart is included with the installation. Specific language versions of the

User Manual may also be available. Check with your GE Sales

Representative for availability.

11-38 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Cart Using

Cart Using

Contents in This Section

• ‘Introduction’ on page 11-39

• ‘Height Adjustment’ on page 11-39

• ‘Locking the Wheels’ on page 11-40

• ‘Mounting the System to Cart’ on page 11-40

• ‘Release the System from Docking Cart’ on page 11-41

• ‘Switch the Three Probes’ on page 11-42

• ‘System Operation’ on page 11-42

Introduction

Docking Cart supports the ultrasound system as below:

• LOGIQ e (Software version R8.x.x)

The docking cart can supply power for the system and peripherals which are mounted to the docking cart.

Height Adjustment

To adjust the height of the mounting-platform, raise the Release lever and pull the platform up or push it down with both hands, the traveling distance is 140mm.

When the lever is released the platform remains at the adjusted height.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

11-39

Docking Cart Setup

Locking the Wheels

Depress the front of the Brake Lever with your foot. With the

Brake Lever down the rolling and swivel function are locked.

Figure 11-15. Released and Locked position

Mounting the System to Cart

The system can be mounted to Docking Cart either while the display screen is closed with the system fully shut-down or in standby mode, or while the display screen is open with the system powered On or Off.

NOTE: A battery or an empty battery-shell should always be attached to the system before mounting system to the cart.

CAUTION

Use caution when mounting system while it is turned-on to avoid shocks or vibrations which may be harmful to the hard-drive.

To mount the system to the cart:

11-40

Figure 11-16. Mounting System to Cart

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Cart Using

Mounting the System to Cart (continued)

NOTE:

1. Hold the system slightly tilted towards you and place the front bottom part over the front sliding guides.

When put the system on docking cart top cover ,aviod injuring the fingures and hands.

2. Lower the rear part of the system to sit over the rear sliding guides. Push the system towards the rear until you feel that it stops and you hear a click (While pushing the system to the rear, prop the vertical plane behind the handles with fingers so that the cart does not move) lock the system. At this stage the system should be locked well on all four comers.Gently pull the system up to verify that it is locked well and can not be easily released.

4. Connect the probe connector of Three-probe Port to the system, press the probe connector locking lever up.

Release the System from Docking Cart

The system can be mounted to Docking Cart either while the display screen is closed with the system fully shut-down or in standby mode, or while the display screen is open with the system powered On or Off.

CAUTION

Before dismounting the system while it is powered ON, be sure to check availability and charge of battery, as system will switch-over to battery operation as it is released.

To release the system from mounting platform:

Figure 11-17. Release the System from Cart

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

11-41

Docking Cart Setup

Release the System from Docking Cart (continued)

1. Disconnect the probe connector of Three-Probe Port from the system.

2. Rotate the handle to unlock system

3. Place palm of one hand on the handle and push the system release button toward you with the other hand until it stops, then release the button back to it’s normal position.

4. Lift up the system from the platform.

Switch the Three Probes

The system can switch the probe between the three probe which are connected in the Docking Cart Three Probes Box.

From the keyboard, press the Exam key. The Probe screen appears. Select the probe which you want.

Figure 11-18. Probe Screen

NOTE: If the docking cart loses power, the factory default probe is the probe which is connected to the port.

System Operation

LOGIQ e is supported on Docking Cart.

NOTE: To upgrade the system, release the system from the Docking

Cart and connect the USB Memory Stick or SD Card to the system directly.

NOTE: To power off Docking Cart, open the circuit breaker and then pull out the AC Power Cord from the wall AC outlet.

NOTE: Do not plug the AC Power into the wall in the state of closing the circuit breaker.

11-42 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Docking Cart Functions (Theory)

Docking Cart Functions (Theory)

Overview

Block Diagram

The section explains Docking Cart's system concepts, component arrangement, and subsystem function.

Figure 11-19. Docking Cart Function Diagram

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

11-43

Docking Cart Setup

Information

DockBoard is a PWA, it has a Docking Port, which is responsible for docking and connecting to the LOGIQ e.

The DC20V Power is transferred via this PWA Board and is extended from this board to USB HUB and peripherals.

It is a PWA, which take most charge of the Docking Cart electric system: Network, USB connection, DVI.

Supported External Interface/Port

Item

1

2

3

DVI

Table 11-15: Supported external interface/port

Interface/Port Description

Support to 1024x768,60Hz

USB 2.0

4 USB 2.0 ports

Figure 11-20. Supported external Interface/Port

1. Network 2. DVI 3. USB port

11-44 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Diagnostics/Troubleshooting

Diagnostics/Troubleshooting

Overview

This section describes how to setup and run the tools that help

Docking Cart operation. Cart and board level diagnostics are run whenever power is applied. Some Service Tools may be run at the application level.

Troubleshooting

There is a troubleshooting tool available that the customer can use as a first step to investigate failure issues. It gives the current status of failure and provides some relative ways to figure out.

Gathering Trouble Data

There may be a time when it would be advantageous to capture trouble information for acquisition through remote diagnostics or to be sent back to the manufacturer for analysis. There are different options to acquire this data that would give different results.

• Product Name: Docking Cart

• Docking Cart S/N Number:

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

11-45

Docking Cart Setup

Troubleshooting Trees

System Does Not Boot

System doesn’t boot!

11-46

Is the AC power cable seated to the Scanner and to the wall power outlet?

YES

NO

Connect the AC power cable between the Scanner and the wall power outlet in right way.

Is the main breaker turned

ON?

YES

NO

Turn ON the main breaker of the Scanner.

Has the ON/OFF

key on the Control Panel been pressed once?

NO

YES

Press the ON/OFF button on the

Control Panel.

End

Figure 11-21. System Does Not Boot

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Can Not Charge the Extended Life Battery

Diagnostics/Troubleshooting

Figure 11-22. Can not Charge the Extended Life Battery

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

11-47

Docking Cart Setup

Extended Life Battery Has No OUTPUT

11-48

Figure 11-23. Extended Life Battery Has No OUTPUT

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Chapter 12

Docking Cart Servicing

This Chapter describes replacement procedure and lists the renewal parts available for Docking Cart. The Care and Maintenance on Docking Cart is also provided.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

12-1

Docking Cart Servicing

Overview

Contents in this chapter

• ‘Overview’ on page 12-2

• ‘Replacement Procedure’ on page 12-3

• ‘Disassembly/Re-assembly’ on page 12-3

• ‘Renewal Parts’ on page 12-12

• ‘Care & Maintenance’ on page 12-23

Introduction

Safety consideration

This chapter contains this information:

• Describes replacement procedures for the modules and subsystems of Docking Cart.

• Provides an overview of Renewal Parts for Docking Cart.

• Describes Care & Maintenance on Docking Cart and peripherals. These procedures intended to maintain the quality of Docking Cart systems performance.

NOTE: Please refer to Chapter 1 and Chapter 2 for the safety information and site requirement for the Docking Cart. Chapter 1 and Chapter 2 should be read before conducting any service work on Docking Cart.

List of Abbreviations

• Assy - Assembly

• Ctrl - Control

• Int - Internal

• I/O - Input/Output

• LCD - Liquid Crystal Display

• PC - Personal Computer (Back End Processor)

12-2 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Replacement Procedure

Replacement Procedure

Introduction

This section describes how to remove and install, or replace, modules and subsystems in the Docking Cart.

Contents in this Section

• ‘Introduction’ on page 12-2

• ‘Disassembly/Re-assembly’ on page 12-3

• ‘Warning and Caution’ on page 12-3

• ‘Storage Rack (Part No. 5219976-2)’ on page 12-7

• ‘Rear Panel Assy (Part No. 5422978)’ on page 12-8

• ‘Extended Life Battery (Part No. 5486499)’ on page 12-9

Disassembly/Re-assembly

Warning and Caution

WARNING

DO NOT service or disassemble parts under FRU unit level at any circumstances.

CAUTION

WARNING

DO NOT wear the ESD wrist strap when you remove a part of power supply unit. Turn OFF power and unplug the power cord before removing a part of power supply unit. However be sure to turn off power and wear the strap before you remove a circuit boards.

Only Qualified service personnel should remove any covers or panels. Electrical hazards exists at several points inside.

Before thoroughly familiar with all hazardous voltages and high current levels to avoid accidental contact.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

12-3

Docking Cart Servicing

Disassembly/Re-assembly (continued)

WARNING

WARNING

WARNING

Because of the limited access to cabinets and equipment in the field, placing people in awkward positions, GE has limited the lifting weight for one person in the field to 16 KG (35 LBS).

Anything over 16 KG (35 LBS) requires 2 people.

DO NOT touch any boards with integrated circuits prior to taking the necessary ESD precautions.

Always connect yourself, via an arm-wrist strap, to the advised

ESD connection point located on the rear of the Ultrasound system (near the power connector).

Follow general guidelines for handling of electrostatic sensitive equipment.

The waste of electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed as unsorted municipal waste and must be collected separately.

Please contact the manufacturer or other authorized disposal company to decommission your equipment.

12-4 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Replacement Procedure

3-Probe Port Assy (Part No. 5423182-2)

Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the

Docking Cart 3-Probe Port Assy.

Tools

• Common Phillips screwdrivers

Needed Manpower

• 1 person, 1minutes + travel

Preparation

• Shut down the system and switch off the main breaker.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

12-5

Docking Cart Servicing

Removal Procedure

Table 12-1: Removal Procedure for 3-Probe Port Assy

No.

1.

Steps

Disconnect the probe connector

Corresponding Graphic

2. Pull out the lock and rotate the lock 90° clockwise.

3. Hold the 3-Probe Port with both hands, meanwhile use one finger of the right hand to push up the lock on 3-Probe

Port and move the 3-Probe

Port to the right, then remove the 3-Probe Port.

The two screws on the

3-Probe Port are released from the bracket.

Take down the 3-Probe Port.

Mounting Procedure

Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.

See ‘Install 3-Probe Port to Docking Cart’ on page 11-28 for

more information.

12-6 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Replacement Procedure

Storage Rack (Part No. 5219976-2)

Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the

Storage Rack.

Tools

• Common Phillips screwdrivers

Needed Manpower

• 1 person, 1 minutes + travel

Preparation

• NA

Removal Procedure

No.

1.

Table 12-2: Removal Procedure for Storage Rack

Steps

Unscrew the 2 screws.

Corresponding Graphic

2. Remove the storage rack from the top cabinet.

Mounting Procedure

1. Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

12-7

Docking Cart Servicing

Rear Panel Assy (Part No. 5422978)

Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the

Rear Panel Assy.

Tools

Needed Manpower

• 1 person, 1 minutes + travel

Preparation

• Shut down the system and switch off the main breaker.

Removal Procedure

Table 12-3: Removal Procedure for Rear Panel Assy

No.

1.

Steps

Loose the 4 screws.

Corresponding Graphic

2. Remove the rear panel Assy.

Mounting Procedure

1. Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.

12-8 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Replacement Procedure

Extended Life Battery (Part No. 5486499)

Purpose: This is a description on how to remove and replace the

Extended Life Battery.

Tools

Needed Manpower

• 1 person, 1 minutes + travel

Preparation

• Shut down the system and switch off the main breaker.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

12-9

Docking Cart Servicing

Extended Life Battery (Part No. 5486499) (continued)

Removal Procedure

Table 12-4: Removal Procedure Extended Life Battery

No.

1.

Steps

Flip down the two handle locks on the

Extended Life Battery.

Corresponding Graphic

2. Pull out the Extended Life Battery.

3. While pressing the two spring lockings on both side of the battery with fingers, then move out the battery.

12-10 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

No.

4.

Replacement Procedure

Table 12-4: Removal Procedure Extended Life Battery

Steps

Take out the battery with both hands.

Corresponding Graphic

Mounting Procedure

1. Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal.

See ‘Install Extended Life Battery to Docking Cart’ on

page 11-24 for more information.

After the battery is installed, try pulling the battery to check if the battery is fixed in the power box.

• If the battery can not be pulled out, it means the battery is well installed.

• If the battery can be pulled out, it means the battery is not well installed. Reinstall the battery until it can not be pulled out from power box.

CAUTION

Use caution to avoid injuring hands when installing the

Extended Life Battery.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

12-11

Docking Cart Servicing

Renewal Parts

Contents in This Section

• ‘Introduction’ on page 12-12

• ‘Power Cable’ on page 12-13

• ‘Operator Console Assy’ on page 12-14

• ‘Docking Station’ on page 12-15

• ‘Probe Holder’ on page 12-17

• ‘Shelf Service’ on page 12-19

• ‘Bottom and Wheels’ on page 12-20

• ‘Panel and Cabinet’ on page 12-21

• ‘Gas Spring and Gas Spring Lever’ on page 12-21

• ‘Power Box and Extended Life Battery’ on page 12-21

Introduction

This chapter lists the renewal parts available for Docking Cart.

12-12 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Item

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

9

10

11

12

Power Cable

Table 12-5: Docking Cart Power Cable List

Part Number

5177126-2

5177195-2

5177154-2

5177187-3

5177123-2

5176907-2

5176773-2

5176753-2

5176304-2

5177146-2

5177153-2

5400868-2

Description

Power Cable for Japan

Power Cable for Argentina

Power Cable for Switzerland

Power Cable for Australia

Power Cable for Europe

Power Cable for United Kingdom

Power Cable for India

Power Cable for Israel

Power Cable for China

Power Cable for USA

Power Cable for Denmark

Power Cable for Brazil

Renewal Parts

Quantity

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

12-13

Docking Cart Servicing

Operator Console Assy

1. Lever

2. Up/Down

4. B/W Printer shelf

5. Speaker

Figure 12-1. Operator Console Assy

8. Ethernet port, DVI, USB ports

10. Cable hook

11. Power box

12-14 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Renewal Parts

Docking Station

Item

700

Table 12-6: Docking Station

Part

Number

5422689-2

Part Name

LOGIQ e Top Support

Corresponding graphic Qty

1

701 5423180-2 LOGIQ e DS Top Cover Assy 1

702 5423191-2 LOGIQ e DS Main PWA

703 5444585 LOGIQ e Multiport board cable

1

1

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

12-15

Docking Cart Servicing

Item

704

Table 12-6: Docking Station

Part

Number

5421742

Part Name

Docking Cart Monitor Support

Space Cap

Corresponding graphic Qty

1

705 5422460 Docking Cart DS Bottom

Cover

1

12-16 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Renewal Parts

Probe Holder

Item

800

Table 12-7: Docking Probe Holder

Part

Number

5423182-2

Part Name

LOGIQ e 3-probe Box Assy

Corresponding graphic Qty

1

801 5422462-2 LOGIQ e Docking Cart

3-probe box left cover

802 5422461 LOGIQ e Docking Cart

3-probe box right cover

803 5240778-2 Probe Holder Service Kit

1

1

1

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

12-17

Docking Cart Servicing

Table 12-7: Docking Probe Holder

Item

804

Part

Number

5483613

Part Name

3-probe Box Supporter

Bracket Assy

Corresponding graphic Qty

1

12-18 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Renewal Parts

Shelf Service

Item

900

Table 12-8: Shelf Service

Part

Number

5255346-2

Part Name

Support shelf with package

Corresponding graphic Qty

1

901 5219976-2 Storage Rack 1

902 5255345-2 Peripheral shelf with package 1

903 5423171-2 Top DVD Shelf Assy 1

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

12-19

Docking Cart Servicing

Bottom and Wheels

Table 12-9: Bottom and Wheels

Item

1000

Part

Number

5441308

Part Name

USB HUB Assy

Corresponding graphic Qty

1

1 1001 5443853 Black white Rear Castor

N125 from Secure

1002 5454032 Black white Front Castor

N125 from Secure

1003 5458670 DCAC adapter for printer 1

1

12-20 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Renewal Parts

Panel and Cabinet

Item

1100

Table 12-10: Panel and Cabinet

Part

Number

5422978

Part Name

Cart Rear Panel Assy

Corresponding graphic Qty

1

Gas Spring and Gas Spring Lever

Table 12-11: Gas Spring and Gas Spring Lever

Item

1200

Part

Number

5423168

Part Name

Gas Spring Lever Assy

Corresponding graphic

1201 5245175 Gas Spring Service Kit

Qty

1

1

Power Box and Extended Life Battery

Item

1300

Part

Number

5439693

Table 12-12: Power Box and Extended Life Battery

Part Name

LOGIQ e Power Box for

Docking Cart

Corresponding graphic Qty

1

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

12-21

Docking Cart Servicing

Item

1301

Part

Number

5440512

Table 12-12: Power Box and Extended Life Battery

Part Name

Extended Life Battery for

Docking Cart Power Box

Corresponding graphic Qty

1

12-22 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Care & Maintenance

Care & Maintenance

Contents in This Section

• ‘Overview’ on page 12-23

• ‘Purpose’ on page 12-23

• ‘Periodic Maintenance Inspections’ on page 12-24

• ‘Why do Maintenance’ on page 12-25

• ‘Maintenance Task Schedule’ on page 12-26

• ‘Tools Required’ on page 12-28

• ‘Safety Test’ on page 12-30

• ‘Inspection Paper Work’ on page 12-35

Overview

Purpose

This section describes Care & Maintenance on Docking Cart.

These procedures are intended to maintain the quality of

Docking Cart. Read this chapter completely and familiarize yourself with the procedures before performing a task.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

12-23

Docking Cart Servicing

Periodic Maintenance Inspections

It has been determined by engineering that your Docking Cart system does not have any high wear components that fail with use, therefore no Periodic Maintenance Inspections are mandatory. Some Customers Quality Assurance Programs may require additional tasks and or inspections at a different frequency than listed in this manual.

CAUTION

Practice good ESD prevention. Wear an anti–static strap when handling electronic parts and even when disconnecting/ connecting cables.

DANGER

CAUTION

THERE ARE SEVERAL PLACES ON THE BACKPLANE, THE

AC DISTRIBUTION, AND DC DISTRIBUTION THAT ARE

DANGEROUS. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT THE SYSTEM

POWER PLUG AND OPEN THE MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER

BEFORE YOU REMOVE ANY PARTS. BE CAUTIOUS

WHENEVER POWER IS STILL ON AND COVERS ARE

REMOVED.

Do not pull out or insert circuit boards while power is ON.

CAUTION

Do not operate this unit unless all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. System performance and cooling require this.

12-24 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Care & Maintenance

Why do Maintenance

Keeping Records

It is good business practice that ultrasound facilities maintain records of quality checks and corrective maintenance. The

Ultrasound Inspection Certificate (provided on ‘Inspection Paper

Work’ on page 12-35 ) provides the customer with documentation that the ultrasound scanner is maintained on a periodic basis.

A copy of the Ultrasound Periodic Maintenance Inspection

Certificate should be kept in the same room or near the scanner.

Quality Assurance

In order to gain accreditation from organizations such as the

American College of Radiology (USA), it is the customer’s responsibility to have a quality assurance program in place for each scanner. The program must be directed by a medical physicists, the supervising radiologist/physician or appropriate designee.

Routine quality control testing must occur regularly. The same tests are performed during each period so that changes can be monitored over time and effective corrective action can be taken.

Testing results, corrective action and the effects of corrective action must be documented and maintained on the site.

Your GE service representative can help you with establishing, performing and maintaining records for a quality assurance program. Please contact us for coverage information and/or price for service.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

12-25

Docking Cart Servicing

Maintenance Task Schedule

How often should care & maintenance tasks be performed?

The Care & Maintenance Task Schedule (provided on

Table 12-13 on page 12-26 ) specifies how often your Docking

Cart should be serviced and outlines items requiring special attention.

NOTE: It is the customer’s responsibility to ensure the Docking Cart care & maintenance is performed as scheduled in order to retain its high level of safety, dependability and performance.

Your GE Service Representative has an in-depth knowledge of your LOGIQ e ultrasound scanning system and can best provide competent, efficient service. Please contact us for coverage information and/or price for service.

Your GE Service Representative has an in-depth knowledge of your LOGIQ e ultrasound scanning system and can best provide competent, efficient service. Please contact us for coverage information and/or price for service.

NOTE: If conditions exist which exceed typical usage and patient load, then it is recommended to increase the maintenance frequencies.

Table 12-13: Customer Care Schedule

Service at Indicated

Time

Clean Probe Holders

Clean Air Filter

Inspect AC Mains Cable

Daily Weekly

X

X

Monthly

X

Per Facilities

QA Program Notes

more frequently depending on your environment

Mobile Unit Check

Weekly

Inspect Cables and

Connectors

Clean Console

Inspect Wheels, Casters, brakes and Swivel Locks

Check Control Panel

Movement

Console Leakage Current

Checks

X

X

X

X

X

Mobile Unit Check

Daily

Mobile Unit Check

Daily also after corrective maintenance

12-26 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Care & Maintenance

Service at Indicated

Time

Peripheral Leakage

Current Checks

Table 12-13: Customer Care Schedule

Daily Weekly Monthly

Per Facilities

QA Program

X

Surface Probe Leakage

Current Checks

Endocavity Probe

Leakage

Current Checks

Transesphongeal Probe

Leakage

Current Checks

Surgical Probe Leakage

Current Checks

Functional Checks

X

X

X

X

X

Notes

also after corrective maintenance also after corrective maintenance also after corrective maintenance also after corrective maintenance also after corrective maintenance also after corrective maintenance

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

12-27

Docking Cart Servicing

Tools Required

Standard GE Tool Kit

The following is a description of the “Standard” GE tool kit in the

USA. Not all tools are required for PMs.

Please refer to ‘Standard GE tool kit’ on page 10-17 for the information.

Special Tools, Supplies and Equipment

Table 12-14: Overview of Requirement for Care & Maintenance

Tool

Digital Volt Meter (DVM)

Leakage Current Ultrasound

Kit

Anti Static Kit

Part Number

2113015

Comments

For 120V and 220V Units

Anti Static Vacuum Cleaner

Air Filter

Safety Analyzer

CD-RW Media

B/W Printer Cleaning Sheet

Color Printer Cleaning Sheet

Disposable Gloves

46–194427P231

46–194427P279

46–194427P369

46–194427P373

46–194427P370

46–194427P278

46–194427P279

Kit includes anti–static mat, wrist strap and cables for 200 to 240 V system

3M #2204 Large adjustable wrist strap

3M #2214 Small adjustable wrist strap

3M #3051 conductive ground cord

120V

230V

air intake

The safety Analyzer tool should be calibrated and compliant with AAMI/ESI 1993 or IEC

60601 or AS/NZS 3551.

For LOGIQ e

See printer user manual for requirements

See printer user manual for requirements

12-28 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Care & Maintenance

Cleaning Dusk Screen

The dusk screen requires weekly cleaning in order to retain its performance. Power off the Power Box when the dusk screen is removed for cleaning.

1. Pull out the Dusk Screen from the power box.

Figure 12-2. Pull out the Dusk Screen

2. Dust the Dusk Screen with a vacuum cleaner and/or wash it with a mild soapy solution. If washed, rinse and dry the Dusk

Screen before re-installation.

Figure 12-3. Clean the Dusk Screen

3. Re-install the Dusk Screen on the power box.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Figure 12-4. Re-install the Dusk Screen

12-29

Docking Cart Servicing

Safety Test

Input Power

Step

1

2

3

4

Item

Unplug Cord

Inspect

Verify

Verify

Table 12-15: Main Cable Inspection

Description

Disconnect the mains cable from the wall and system.

Inspect it and its connectors for damage of any kind.

Verify that the LINE, NEUTRAL and GROUND wires are properly attached to the terminals, and that no strands may cause a short circuit.

Inlet connector retainer is functional.

Cleaning

Step

1

Item

Console

2 Probe Holder

Table 12-16: General Cleaning

Description

Use a fluid detergent in warm water on a soft, damp cloth to carefully wipe the entire console. Be careful not to get the cloth too wet so that moisture does not enter the console.

Clean probe holders (they may need to be soaked to remove excess gel).

12-30 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Care & Maintenance

Safety Test (continued)

Physical Inspection

Step

1

2

3

4

5

8

9

6

7

Item

Labeling

Table 12-17: Physical Checks

Description

Verify that all system labeling is present and in readable condition. refer to the LOGIQ e User Manual for details.

Inspect the console for dents, scratches or cracks.

Scratches &

Dents

Wheels &

Brakes

Cables &

Connectors

Shielding &

Covers

External I/O

Op Panel Lights

Monitor Light

External

Microphone

Check all wheels and casters for wear and verify operation of foot brake, to stop the unit from moving, and release mechanism. Check all caster locks and caster swivel locks for proper operation.

Check all internal cable harnesses and connectors for wear and secure connector seating. Pay special attention to footswitch assembly and probe strain or bend reliefs.

Check to ensure that all EMI shielding, internal covers, air flow panels and screws are in place. Missing covers and hardware could cause EMI/RFI problems while scanning.

Check all connectors for damage and verify that the labeling is good.

Check for proper operation of all operator panel and TGC lights.

Check for proper operation of any monitor lights if available.

Check for proper operation of any external microphones by recording an audio test.

Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA & Canada

Please refer to ‘Outlet test - wiring arrangement’ on page 10-35 for the information.

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

12-31

Docking Cart Servicing

Safety Test (continued)

Grounding continuity

DANGER ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD. THE PATIENT MUST NOT BE

CONTACTED TO THE EQUIPMENT DURING THIS TEST.

Measure the resistance from the third pin of the attachment plug to the exposed metal parts of the case. The ground wire resistance should be less than 0.2 ohms. Reference the procedure in the IEC60601-1.

Meter Procedure

2. OHMMETER

4. ACCESSIBLE METAL PART:

• MONITOR HOUSING

• PEAR PANEL CONNECTOR

• ANY CASTER/WHEEL SUPPORT

Figure 12-5. Ground continuity test

Follow these steps to test the ground wire resistance.

• Turn the LOGIQ e unit OFF.

• Plug the unit into the meter, and the meter into the tested

AC wall outlet.

• Plug the black chassis cable into the meter's “CHASSIS” connector and attach the black chassis cable clamp to an exposed metal part of the LOGIQ e unit.

• Set the meter's “FUNCTION” switch to the RESISTANCE position.

• Set the meter's “POLARITY” switch to the OFF (center) position.

• Measure and record the ground wire resistance.

12-32 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Care & Maintenance

Safety Test (continued)

Chassis Leakage Current Test

Please refer to ‘Chassis leakage current test’ on page 10-37 for the information.

Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage - Lead to Lead

Refer to the procedure in the IEC 60601-1.

Isolated Patient Lead (Sink) Leakage-Isolation Test

Refer to the procedure in the IEC 60601-1.

CAUTION

Line voltage is applied to the ECG leads during this test. To avoid possible electric shock hazard, the system being tested must not be touched by patients, users or anyone while the

ISO TEST switch is depressed.

NOTE: It is not necessary to test each lead individually or power condition combinations as required in previous tests.

Data Sheet for ECG Leakage Current:

The test passes when all readings measure less than the value shown in the table below. Record all data on the PM Inspection

Certificate.

Table 12-18: Maximum Allowance Limit for ECG Leakage Current

Patient Lead to Ground Leakage Current Test and

Patient Lead to Lead Leakage Current Test

AC Power

Source

115V

220/240V

Maximum Allowance Limit

Ground

Open

Ground

Closed

10uA

500uA

10uA

10uA

Table 12-19: Maximum Allowance Limit for ECG Leakage Current

Patient Lead Isolation Current Test

AC Power

Source

115V

220/240V

Maximum Allowance Limit

20uA

5mA

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

12-33

Docking Cart Servicing

Isolated Patient Lead (Sink) Leakage-Isolation Test (continued)

Table 12-20:

RL

Tester Lead Selector

RA LA LL

ECG

Power

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

Tester

Polarity

Switch

NORM

REVERSE

NORM

REVERSE

NORM

REVERSE

NORM

REVERSE

Tester

Ground

Switch

CLOSED

CLOSED

OPEN

OPEN

CLOSED

CLOSED

OPEN

OPEN

C

Probe Leakage Current Test

Please refer to ‘Probe leakage current test’ on page 10-39 for the information.

When There’s Too Much Leakage Current...

Please refer to ‘When there's too much leakage current …’ on

page 10-42

for the information.

12-34 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Care & Maintenance

Inspection Paper Work

ULTRASOUND INSPECTION CERTIFICATE

Customer Name: System ID: Dispatch Number /

Date Performed:

System Type

Probe 1:

Probe 2:

Probe 3:

Probe 4:

Probe 5:

Probe 6:

Probe 7:

Probe 8:

Probe 9:

Frequency:

Frequency:

Frequency:

Frequency:

Frequency:

Frequency:

Frequency:

Frequency:

Frequency:

Model Number:

Scan Format*:

Scan Format*:

Scan Format*:

Scan Format*:

Scan Format*:

Scan Format*:

Scan Format*:

Scan Format*:

Scan Format*:

Serial Number:

Model Number:

Model Number:

Model Number:

Model Number:

Model Number:

Model Number:

Model Number:

Model Number:

Model Number:

Warranty/Contract/HBS

Manufacture Date:

Serial Number:

Serial Number:

Serial Number:

Serial Number:

Serial Number:

Serial Number:

Serial Number:

Serial Number:

Serial Number:

*Scan Format: Phased Array, Linear Array, Curved Array,

Mechanical Array or Other

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

12-35

Docking Cart Servicing

Inspection Paper Work (continued)

FUNCTIONAL CHECKS PHYSICAL INSPECTION AND CLEANING

Functional Check (if applicable) OK? or N/A

Physical Inspection and

Cleaning

(if applicable)

Inspect Clean

B-Mode Function

Doppler Modes Function

CF-Mode Function

M-Mode Function

Applicable Software Options

Applicable Hardware Options

Control Panel

Measurement Accuracy

GE Approved Peripherals

Console

Monitor

Touch Panel

Air Filter

Probe Holders

External I/O

Wheels, Brakes & Swivel Locks

Cables and Connectors

GE Approved Peripherals

(CD-RW, MOD, Printers)

COMMENTS:

12-36 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Care & Maintenance

Inspection Paper Work (continued)

ELECTRICAL SAFETY

Electrical Test Performed Max

Value

Allowed

Outlet (correct ground &wiring config.)

System Ground Continuity

Chassis Source Leakage Current -

Probe

Chassis Source Leakage Current -

Caster

Chassis Source Leakage Current - CRT

Patient Lead Source Leakage

(Lead to Ground)

Patient Lead Source Leakage

(Lead to Lead)

Patient Lead Source Leakage

(Isolation)

Peripheral 1 Leakage Current

Peripheral 1Ground Continuity

Peripheral 2 Leakage Current

Peripheral 2Ground Continuity

Peripheral 3 Leakage Current

Peripheral 3Ground Continuity

Probe Number

(from previous page)

Value

Measured

OK?

Comments

PROBES

Max

Value

Allowed

Max

Value

Measured

OK?

Comments

Probe 1:

Probe 2:

Probe 3:

Probe 4:

Probe 5:

Probe 6:

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

12-37

Docking Cart Servicing

Probe 7:

Probe 8:

Probe 9:

Final Check. All system covers are in place. System scans with all probes as expected.

Accepted by:______________________________________________________________________

12-38 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Index

A

abbrevations, 9-2 acclimate time, 2-3

Admin screen

Logon, 10-11 approved internal peripherals, 3-22 approved internal peripherals, 3-22 average setup time, 3-3

B

before installation (site preparations), 2-1

Boot Up, 3-15

C

cable inspection mains cable inspection, 10-24 care and maintenance, 10-1 warnings, 10-12

CE compliance, 1-32 change history, i-1 chapter 1 introduction, 1-1 chassis leakage current test, 10-37 cold or hot if the unit is very cold or hot, 2-3 compatibility hardware/software, 9-3 completing the setup, 3-13 compliance, 1-32 configuration, 3-20 connect probe, 3-18 console environmental requirements, 2-3 console requirements, 2-3 contact information, 1-34 contents in this manual, 1-3 conventions used in book, 1-7 copyrights, i-14 customer assistance, 1-34 phone numbers, 1-35 customer order verification, 3-12 customer provided prerequisite, 8-13

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

D

damage in transport, i-11 dangerous procedure warnings, 1-29 data network setup requirements, 2-16 desirable features, 2-14

DICOM network function, 2-16

DICOM setup requirements, 2-17 disconnect probe, 3-19 display PDF files from manual CD-ROM print PDF files from manual CD-ROM, 4-15

E

electrical requirements, 2-6

EMI limitations

EMI limitations, 2-9 general requirements, 2-6 power stability requirements power stability requirements, 2-7 power transients power transients, 2-7 site circuit breaker site circuit breaker, 2-7 site power outlets site power outlets, 2-7 specific requirements for the unit, 2-6, 3-22 unit power plug unit power plug, 2-7 voltage drop-out voltage drop-out, 2-7 electrical safety, 1-24 electrical safety tests, 10-30 electrical specification, 3-14 electromagnetic interference abatement, 2-10 prevention, 2-10 electrostatic discharge prevention, 1-33

EMC, 1-32 compliance, 1-32 what is EMC?, 1-32

EMI, 1-32 abatement, 2-10 prevention, 2-10 protection, 3-12

Index-1

environmental dangers, 2-19 environmental specifications for the unit, 2-4 errors, i-12

ESD, 1-32

ESD prevention, 1-33 exam study, display location, 4-20 examine packages, 3-6

F

facility needs, 2-12 desirable features, 2-14

DICOM network function, 2-16

DICOM setup requirements, 2-17 network setup requirements, 2-16 purchaser responsibilities, 2-12 required facility needs, 2-13 suggested floor plan scanner and EchoPAC in same room, 2-15 floor plan suggestion scanner and EchoPAC in same room, 2-15 focal zone, display location, 4-20 functional checks, 10-23 mains cable inspection, 10-24 system checks, 10-23

G

GE Healthcare leakage current limits, 10-33 general console requirements, 2-3 generic procedure on probe leakage current, 10-40 grounding continuity, 10-36, 12-32

H

I

hardware/software compatibility, 9-3 hardware-software compatibility, 5-3 hot or cold if the unit is very cold or hot, 2-3 how often should maintenance tasks be performed?,

10-15

human safety, 1-19 icons, 1-7 icons indicating a special procedure to be used, 1-10 if the unit is very cold or hot, 2-3 imaging parameters, display location, 4-20 important precautions, i-2 installation see "system setup", 3-1 installation warnings see "setup warnings", 3-3 introduction (chapter 1), 1-1

L

legal notes, i-14 lighting, 2-5 list of abbrevations, 9-2 loading software, 8-13 lockout/tagout (LOTO) requirements, 1-30 log on procedures defining, 10-11

Logon

Admin screen, 10-11

LOTO lockout/tagout requirements, 1-30

M

mains cable inspection, 10-24 maintenance physical inspection, 10-25 preliminary checks, 10-21 system maintenance, 10-21 maintenance task schedule, 10-15 manufacturer, 1-35 mass with monitor and peripherals, 3-13

Measurement Summary window, display location,

4-20

mechanical safety, 1-22 model designations, 1-7 models covered by this manual, 1-5

N

network setup requirements, 2-16

O

omission and errors, i-12 operational and storage temperature for probes, 2-11

P

P4 Key Function, 7-10 paperwork after setup, 3-33

PDF files display and print, 4-15 periodic maintenance inspection (PM), PM (periodic maintenance inspection), 10-13 phone numbers customer assistance, 1-35 physical dimensions, 3-13 physical inspection at arrivel, 3-12

Power On, 3-15 precautions certified electrical contractor statement, i-11 damage in transport, i-11 important precautions, i-2

Index-2 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

service safety considerations, i-13 translation policy, i-2 prepeare for setup, 3-12 prerequisite provided by customer, 8-13 probe connect, 3-18 disconnect, 3-19 probe cleaning, 10-28 probe identifier, locating, 4-20 probe leakage current test, 10-39 probe maintenance, 10-27 basic probe care, 10-27 basic probe cleaning, 10-28 probe related checks, 10-27 probe related checks, 10-27 probes environmental requirements, 2-11 operational and storage temperature for probes,

2-11

product icons, 1-11 product locator installation card, 3-33 products covered by this manual, 1-5 proprietary to GE Healthcare, i-14

Purchaser responsibilities, 2-12 purpose of operator manual, 1-5

R

receiving and unpacking, 3-6 receiving the product, 3-6 required facility needs, 2-13 requirements, 2-3 requirements verification, 3-13 returning/shipping probes and repair parts, 1-31 revision history, i-1

S

safety human, 1-19 safety precaution messages, 1-8 safety test overview, 10-30 service safety considerations, i-13 setup completion, 3-13 preparations, 3-12 reminders, 3-3 setup time, 3-3 setup warnings, 3-3 shipping/returning probes and repair parts, 1-31 site preparations, 2-1 software loading, 8-13 software option configuration, 3-31 software/hardware compatibility, 9-3 software-hardware compatibility, 5-3 specifications, 3-13 electrical specifications, 3-14 physical dimensions, 3-13 standard GE tool kit, 10-17 standard hazard icons, 1-9 statement certified electrical contractor statement, i-11 system specifications, 3-13 system checks, 10-23 system maintenance, 10-21 physical inspection, 10-25 preliminary checks, 10-21 system manufacturer, 1-35 system requirements verification, 3-13 system setup, 3-1

T

tools required, 10-17 special tools, supplies and equipment, 10-20 standard GE tool kit, 10-17 trademarks, i-14 translation policy, i-2 transport damage, i-11 typical users of the service manual, 1-4

U

unpacking, 3-6 unpacking instructions, 3-7

V

verification system requirements, 3-13 verify customer order, 3-12 voltage settings, 3-14

W

warnings, 10-12 dangerous procedures, 1-29 what is EMC?, 1-32 when there’s too much leakage current, 10-42 chassis fails, 10-42

ECG fails, 10-43 new unit, 10-43 peripheral fails, 10-43 probe fails, 10-43 still fails, 10-43

LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

Index-3

Index-4 LOGIQ e – Basic Service Manual

5561650-100 English Rev. 3

GE